Panasonic DMR-EX84C Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions
EG
DVD Recorder
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully. Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Guide
Quick Start
Basic
operations
Notice for DVB functions
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.This DVD recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted
digital broadcast services.
The tuner in this unit is compatible with digital broadcast (digital CATV broadcast or
digital terrestrial broadcast) and analogue broadcast services.
In these operating instructions,
[DVB-C] : indicates features applicable to digital CATV broadcasts (DVB-C). [DVB-T] : indicates features applicable to digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T). [Analogue] : indicates features applicable to analogue broadcasts.
TV Guide Types
TV Guide is displayed with the provided data from broadcast stations.
For digital terrestrial broadcasts (DVB-T) or Analogue broadcasts: The GUIDE Plus+ system is available in Germany/Austria. (as of December 2010)
This service may not be available in some areas in the above countries.There may be changes in the service areas.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.
The region number of this unit is “2”.The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
About descriptions in these operating instructions
Pages to be referred to are
indicated as “> ±±”.
Example:
2
2 ALL
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
VQT3C69
Safety precautions
Getting started
(Inside of product)
Remote control signal sensor
7 m directly in front of the unit
\
supplied accessories
WARNING
Unit
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing. – Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on this
unit. – Use only the recommended accessories. – Do not remove covers. – Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel. – Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit. – Do not place heavy items on this unit.
AC mains lead
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the voltage
printed on this unit. – Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet. – Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead. – Do not handle the plug with wet hands. – Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug. – Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.
Install this unit so that the AC mains lead can be unplugged from
the socket outlet immediately if any problem occurs.
CAUTION
Unit
This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted candles, on
this unit.
This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please increase separation between this unit and the mobile telephone.
This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.
Placement
Place this unit on an even surface.To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,
– Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or
in another confined space. Ensure this unit is well ventilated. – Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with newspapers,
tablecloths, curtains, and similar items. – Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high temperatures,
high humidity, and excessive vibration.
Batteries
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the type recommended by the manufacturer.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and may
cause a fire. – Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the same
time. – Do not heat or expose to flame. – Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight
for a long period of time with doors and windows closed. – Do not take apart or short circuit. – Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries. – Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off. – Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote control
for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
When disposing the batteries, please contact your local authorities
or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. (Product numbers correct as of December 2010. These may be subject to change.)
1 Remote control
1 AC mains lead
1 RF coaxial cable
2Batteries
(N2QAYB000471)
For use with this unit only. Do not use it with other equipment. Also, do not use cords for other equipment with this unit.
for remote control
The remote control information
Batteries
Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
R6/LR6, AA
Use alkaline or manganese batteries.Remote control operations (> 4)
Use
20
30
20
30
VQT3C69
The distance and angles are an approximate.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2
Table of contents
Getting started
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Quick Start Guide
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Easy access to various functions
— FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
STEP 1
Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and
Smart Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
STEP 2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus
(Common Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures
(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Media handling (Disc/USB memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Basic operations
Watching Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Recording television programmes [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Advanced operations
Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
General notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
For recording to discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times . . 23
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 23
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recording broadcasts/titles from external
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recording from digital satellite receiver or video equipment
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Advanced timer recording [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve
overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 27
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . . 27
Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio or
multi-subtitle (Digital broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Searching for the programme in the TV Guide list . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
HOWVIEW number to make timer recordings
Using S
(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Changing the Settings and Editing TV Guide for Analogue
broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
[DVB-T] Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play
—DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To play the title from the beginning [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures
(JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Showing the menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playing DivX video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Playing Music files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Playing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Start Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control
Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TM
”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Convenient functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Editing
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) . . . . . . 44
Editing still pictures and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . 48
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying
Copying titles or Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying new still pictures on the USB memory
—Copy New Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Setting menus
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 60
HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Deleting all titles and Playlists (Video) — Delete all titles. . . . . . . 62
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Deleting all the contents — Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Auto-Play Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 63
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
HOLD function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module) software
upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting a television with AUDIO/VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver . . . . . 73
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover
Getting startedQuick Start
Basic
Advanced
EditingSetting menusReference Copying
VQT3C69
3
Guide
operations
operations
Control reference guide
Quick Start Guide
HDD
DVD
Recording indicator Playback
indicator
Recording/Playback indicator
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.





 


 
OPTION
DRIVE SELECT
1
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
AUDIO
REC
ヵユヹヵ
TV
VOL
AV
3
2
6
54
9
8
INPUT
0
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
E
G
OK
MANUAL SKIP
CHAPTER
-10s
EXT LINK
REC MODE
STTL
DISPLAY
CH
PAGE
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
RETURN
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
TIME SLIP


 
 


  
 
1 Turn the unit on (> 8)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 18)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 21, 26, 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching (> 41)
6 Show digital channel information (> 17)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 27)/Show status messages (> 61)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 32)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 33, 42)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 28, 42)
By using the OPTION button, you may access the various functions (Slideshow, Standby Settings, etc.) quickly and easily.
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 32)
; Colour buttons
– for TV Guide operations (> 27) – for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 33, 34, 37) – for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 53) – for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 56) – for deactivating timer programme (> 26) – for showing the Series Information screen (> 31) – for selecting character type when entering text (> 50) – for tuning settings (> 65)
< Recording functions
[¥ REC] Start recording (> 19)[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 19)[EXT LINK] Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(> 25)
[¥ DIRECT TV REC] Direct TV Recording (> 39)
= Show Teletext information (>
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 72)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 16, 27)
A Show S
B Input select (AV1 or AV2) (> 25)
C Show Timer Recording screen (> 26)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 20, 27)
F Show FUNCTION MENU (> 41)
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 32)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 32)
J Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 32)
K Skip the specified time (> 32)
L Show on-screen menu (> 60)
M Show subtitles (Subtitles can be viewed if the digital broadcast
HOWVIEW screen (> 29)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio or subtitle etc.
programme has subtitles.) (> 16)
16)
The unit’s display
HDD
DVD

1 Disc indicator 2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator 4 USB port indicator 5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator 6 Timer recording indicator 7 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
VQT3C69
4

COPY
D
USB EXT
-L
REC
PLAY
8 Main display section indicator
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
REC
PLAY
REC
PLAY
Main unit
Pull to flip down the front panel.
Select a function.
Selectable items are displayed on the right.
Select an item.
Press [OK].
Press [OK].
 
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 8)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (> 15) 3 USB port (> 15) 4 Display (> 4) 5 Open/Close disc tray (> 15) 6 Channel select (> 16)
7 Start recording (> 19)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 19) 8 Stop (> 18, 19, 32) 9 Start play (> 18) : Remote control signal sensor (> 2)
Rear panel terminals (> 6, 7, 73)
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu) You can access the main function quickly and easily.
Select when you wish to playback the contents. The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will be displayed.
Select the recording method. The TV Guide, Timer Recording or ShowView Record screen will be displayed.
Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.
Select the copy method.
Select to watch TV with the tuner of this unit. “View” is displayed in the FUNCTION MENU when this unit is connected with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 39)
Select and execute a function other than those above, such as recording or setting.
Change which drive is used.
1
HDD
 
 
 
FUNCTION MENU
Playback
Recording Delete
Copy View
Others Drive Select
2
OK
RETURN
Remain
Video Picture Music
30:00 SP
1 Playback
Video (> 18, 33) DivX (> 35) Picture (> 37) Music (> 34, 36) Top Menu (> 18) Menu (> 18)
2 Recording
TV Guide (> 20, 27) Timer Recording (> 20, 26) ShowView Record (> 29)
3 Delete
Video (> 21) Picture (> 47) Music (> 47)
4 Copy
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 52) Advanced Copy (> 53) Copy Music CD (> 58) Copy Music (> 58) Copy New Pictures (> 56)
5 View
6 Others
Playlists (> 44, 48) Flexible Rec (> 24) HDD Management (> 61) DVD Management (> 61) Setup (> 64)
7 Drive Select
HDD DVD USB
Note
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu (

Guide
Quick Start
>
68).
VQT3C69
5
STEP 1
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
BITSTREAM
)
COMMON INTERFACE
CI (Common Interface)
slot
2
1
CAM (Conditional Access Module)
Smart Card
This unit’s rear panel
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
BITSTREAM
)
COMMON INTERFACE
To the terrestrial aerial
Television’s rear panel
Aerial cable/ CATV coaxial cable
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all other connections are
complete.
“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu (> 70)
21-pin Scart
cable
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (> 7, 73)
RF coaxial cable
(supplied)
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.
When connecting to a television
with a built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both television and VCR input terminals.
Common Interface (CI) slot
In order to view or record encrypted CATV services, you must insert a certified CAM and Smart Card into this slot. (> above)
Cable
Digital satellite receiver’s rear panel
For viewing digital satellite broadcasts, connect this unit with a digital satellite receiver before connecting the AC mains lead.
Insert the CAM (Conditional Access Module) and Smart Card
You need a Conditional Access Module together with a valid Smart Card and a subscription with the corresponding CATV provider if you want to watch/record encrypted digital CATV broadcasts.
1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the commercially available CAM (Conditional Access Module). 2 Insert the CAM into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.
TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded.
§
When using unencrypted digital terrestrial broadcasts or analogue broadcasts, you do not need to insert CAM. Proceed to STEP 2. (> below)
§
The recording might be prohibited by broadcasters.
Note
RF IN
VIDEO
L
R
RF OUT
AUDIO
OUT
COMMON INTERFACE
COMMON INTERFACE
AV1 (TV)
AV OUT
OPTICAL
AV2
(
)
EXT
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM
AC IN
AC IN
Be sure to insert the CAM horizontally into the slot.Insert the CAM with the correct direction.For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart
Card, or consult the dealer.
The Common Interface supports the modules according to
DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.
Unplug the AC mains lead before you insert or remove the
CAM with Smart Card. Remove it slowly.
STEP 2 Connection
Using a 21-pin Scart cable
You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 39).You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television (> 86).
Required setting
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 69)
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.Refer to “Additional connections” (> 73) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is
activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]
Connecting a television
Required setting
VQT3C69
6
2
1
VHF/UHF
RF IN
AV
2
RF IN
RF OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
OUT
L
R
3
(
COMMON INTERFACE
COMMON INTERFACE
AV1 (TV)
AV2
)
EXT
AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM
4
AC IN
DO NOT
Television
AV
VCR
This unit
You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV.
OUTOUT
AV OUTAV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTDIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCPCM/M/BITSTREAMBITSTREAM
)
RF IN
RF OUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
R
L
AV1 (TV)
OPTICAL
AV2
(
EXT
)
COMMON INTERFACE
COMMON INTERFACECOMMON INTERFACE
AV
AV
HDMI IN
HDMI AV OUT
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
21-pin Scart cable
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Television’s rear panel
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.
Direct TV Recording (> 39)Watching pictures from digital satellite receiver
(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical”
(> 69). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Digital satellite receiver's rear panel
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
BITSTREAM
)
COMMON INTERFACE
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
Television’s rear panel
Receiver’s rear panel
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video. Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible. [> 39, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
TM
”/Q Link)]
Guide
Quick Start
Required setting
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
AV
RF IN
RF OUT
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
AV1 (TV)
AV2
(
)
EXT
Note
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 85) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.): Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
COMMON INTERFACE
COMMON INTERFACE
AV OUT
HDMI AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM
VQT3C69
7
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
Numbered buttons
Auto Setup
Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels
DVB Auto Setup
Quick Scan
Full Scan
DVB Auto Setup
Progress 0% 100%
No.
Quality
Channel Name Type
Das Erste
ZDF
1 2
TV
Data
9 9
Active Antenna
Please check whether your indoor antenna has its own power supply or needs
Off
On
DVB Auto Setup
Scan CH 5 69
CH
Quality
Channel Name Type
ABC
ABC 2
1 2
TV
Data
9 9
Power Save in Standby
Power Save On
To
6
:00
From
0
:00
Saves standby power consumption
DRIVE
SELECT
1
1
7
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
TV
AV
2
2
54
54
8
8
0
0
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
U
G
OK
OK
VOL
PAGE
3
3
6
6
ShowView
9
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
PLAY/x1.3
I
D
E
F
F
U
U
N
N
RETURN
CH
CH
EXIT
C
C
T
T
I
I
O
O
N
N
M
M
E
E
N
N
U
U
FUNCTION MENU
,,,
OK
RETURN
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
If the Language setting menu appears on the television,
press [3, 4] to select the language and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the
broadcasting systems and press [OK].
Digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup (Selecting 2 or 4 on step 3)
Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
When using indoor antenna that is not equipped with power supply, select “On”.
“DVB Auto Setup” starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels. TV channels will be located and stored ready for use. This takes 5-10 minutes.
When selecting 2, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, “Off” or
“On Timer” and press [OK] when the “Power Save in Standby” setting menu appears.
1 Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue Channels:
Performs the digital CATV broadcasting and analogue broadcasting Auto-Setup.
2 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) & Analogue Channels:
Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting and analogue broadcasting Auto-Setup.
3 Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels:
Performs the digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup only.
4 Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels:
Performs the digital terrestrial broadcasting Auto Setup only.
4 Scan and set up broadcasting
channels.
Digital CATV broadcasting Auto Setup (Selecting 1 or 3 on step 3)
Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and press [OK].
“DVB Auto Setup” starts.
“Quick Scan” searches according to NIT (Network
Information Table) of CATV operators. This takes about 5 minutes. If no digital channels are found by “Quick Scan”, “Full Scan” starts continuously.
“Full Scan” searches all range of the frequency.
This takes about 20 minutes.
When selecting 1, analogue broadcasting “Auto Setup” is executed after “DVB Auto Setup” is completed.
On: It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode
when the unit is in standby mode.
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
On Timer:
(Quick Start mode)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time and then press [OK]. “Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
The features of the Power Save in Standby function when the unit is in standby mode are as below.
Power Save in Standby Activated (On/
On Timer
Power consumption
Approx. 0.3 W Startup time Not Quick
Watching the picture
Cannot do Can do
§1
)
§3
Approx. 16 W
Quick
(e.g. Digital satellite TV) from the device connected to AV2
§1
“Unit’s Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu. (
>
68)
§2
It is possible to startup and start recording within several seconds.
– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it
may take time to display the screen.
§3
When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (
>
71)
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the television. Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect and press [OK].
16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (> 85).
Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television. 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style (> 85).
When television picture appears, setup is complete.
Deactivated
Off
)
(
§2
VQT3C69
8
If the confirmation screen of GUIDE Plus+ data download
Post Code
Current Country : Germany This unit downloads GUIDE Plus+ data several times a day.
CHANGE
appears, perform the following steps.
(For information about GUIDE Plus+ system > 10)
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
7 Press the numbered buttons or
[3, 4, 2, 1] to enter your postal code and press [OK].
GUIDE Plus+ data download starts. This takes about 30 minutes.
8 When the download has finished
Press [OK].
Set up is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
If the clock setting menu appears
Set the clock manually (> 70).
To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (> 65)
To restart set up (> 64)Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue
broadcasts (> right)
Note
When you turn the unit on after inserting the CAM and Smart Card,
depending on the card provider, a PIN code or parental control code may be demanded. (> 10)
Settings of the TV Guide for Analogue broadcasts
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide
Type” and press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Analogue
Channels” and press [OK].
7 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be
turned on again automatically. This procedure may take a few minutes.
All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer
recording settings will be erased.
8 After the power is turned on,
Download the GUIDE Plus+ data following the instructions on the screen.
It may take up to 2 hours to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system.If the “Postal Code” screen is displayed, press
[3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to enter the postal code.
Guide
Quick Start
TV Guide system
TV Guide system provides programme information from the broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV programme magazine. This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or analogue broadcasts. After the Auto Setup (> 8) has completed, it is set to receive the TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. It is required to change the settings to use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts. (> right)
[DVB-T] [Analogue] You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system for TV Guide. (> 10, 30)
Note
TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 69), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated. The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. It is not possible to receive the data via the externally connected digital satellite receiver or digital set-top boxes.
It is possible to record analogue broadcasts using Manual
recording, even without changing the TV Guide Type, and vice versa. (> 26, 29)
9 Confirm the message on the screen.
If “No Data” appears (> 30, Editing TV Guide, Reference)If “No Host channel detected.” appears (> 30, Changing the
settings, Host Channel)
If “Data download was unsuccessful.” appears (> 30,
Changing the settings, Data Download)
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
VQT3C69
9
STEP 3 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
Numbered buttons
TV Guide data download
Analogue broadcasts
The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel (the
Digital broadcasts
[DVB-C] GUIDE Plus+ system is not available (> below)[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ system may not be available in some areas.
When GUIDE Plus+ system is available:
– Download automatically in standby mode – Download manually from “GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now” in
the Setup menu (> 71).
When GUIDE Plus+ system is not available:
– Download automatically while the unit is on. – Download automatically in standby mode
Download in Standby” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (> 71)
§
To select the time to download in standby mode (> 71, TV Guide/Software search period)
For GUIDE Plus+ system
Visit the following homepage for more information.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com
§
.
§
if “TV Guide
television station transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day.
– Download automatically when the unit is turned off.
If you turn on the unit while “GUIDE” appears, the data update
is interrupted.
If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer
recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority. (> 30, Night Download)
– Download manually from “Data Download” in the Setup menu.
(> 30)
Note
Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately
one day before you can display the television programme list.
A station that is not registered in your area is not displayed in the
television programme list even if a signal can be received.
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead during data download.During data download, the HDD rotates and will make operating
sounds.
STEP 4 Setting the CI or CI Plus (Common Interface)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
For more information about TV service, please contact your
service provider.
PIN code query
When you turn the unit on after inserting the card, depending on the card provider, a PIN code or parental control code may be demanded. 1 Enter the 4-digit code with the numbered buttons.
Delete an incorrect number with [DELETE ¢].
2 Confirm your password with [OK].
Note
Other settings on the card, e.g. changing the password, can be
adjusted in the Setup menu. (> 70)
Do not set any limitations about parental controls in “Common
Interface” or recording/viewing programmes may not be possible. Set the parental ratings level using “Child Lock” function. (> 66)
Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this
unit may be limited or not possible.
DELETE
,,,
OK
DRIVE SELECT
1
7
DELETE
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
TV
AV
2 54 8 0
PAUSE
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
G
OK
OK
CHAPTER
VOL
CH
PAGE
3
CH
6
ShowView
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
E
F
F
U
U
N
N
C
C
T
T
I
I
O
O
N
N
M
M
E
E
N
N
U
U
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
RETURN
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Connection”
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Common
VQT3C69
10
press [OK].
press [OK].
and press [1].
Setup
Tuning Disc Picture Sound
Display Connection Others
TV Aspect TV System HDMI Settings AV1 Output AV2 Settnigs Active Antenna Common Interface
SELECT
OK
16:9 PAL
Video
Off
TAB
RETURN
Interface” and press [OK].
The features that appear on the screen are dependent on the contents of the inserted CAM and Smart Card. Follow the on-screen instructions.
On-screen operation guide may not correspond to the
remote control buttons.
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
Do not place the unit on amplifiers or equipment that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
DO NOT
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible to damage. As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
Setup precautions
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
Place in an area where condensation
does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.
Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc. – When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room. – During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is gone.
DO NOT
This unit
VCR
HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording. If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist (Video) will not increase the amount of time.)
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc. gets inside the unit.
While operating
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch. While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or movement due to rotation is normal.
When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.) 2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. 3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short time.)
Guide
Quick Start
Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust. Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and viewing with pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it impossible to record or play discs. Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) about once every year, depending on frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Note
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.
VQT3C69
11
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording/copying and play
(: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Standard symbol
Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture, Music Rewritable Timer recording Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ Recording of copyright-protected titles
§
Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.
Hard disk drive (HDD)
[HDD]
§
Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording/copying times for different discs under different recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times” (> 23).
Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may
prevent you from playing or recording certain discs.
Please see specifications (> 84) for compatible disc
versions and recording speeds.
Recording M 1 and/or M 2 for bilingual broadcasts
(> 22, 52)
Disc type DVD-RAM DVD-R
Standard symbol [RAM] [-R] before finalisation
Data that can be recorded and played Video, Still picture Video or Still picture
Rewritable Play on other players
Timer recording – Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) ≤ Recording of copyright-protected titles
Format (> 62) Necessary Unnecessary
§
Depending on the copy restriction level, these titles may not be recorded.
Disc type DVD-RW +RW
Standard symbol [-RW‹V›] before finalisation
Data that can be recorded and played Video Rewritable Play on other players
Timer recording – Recording 16:9 aspect picture (> 22) – (4:3 aspect) Recording of copyright-protected titles – Format (> 62) Necessary
This disc can be played back on
Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
§
(EXT LINK)
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Finalisation is needed
(> 63).
This disc can be played
back only on equipment compatible with +RW discs.
If the disc failed to play
on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 63).
[DVD-V] after finalisation (Video only)
Videos and still pictures cannot be
mixed on one disc.
Finalisation is needed (> 63).
[+RW] [+R] before finalisation
+R
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Finalisation is needed
(> 63).
[-R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation
Finalisation is needed
(> 63).
This disc can be played
back only on equipment compatible with DVD-R DL discs.
DVD-R DL
Video
+R DL
[+R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation
Finalisation is needed
(> 63).
This disc can be played
back only on equipment compatible with +R DL discs.
VQT3C69
12
Recording format
This unit records video in the following formats.
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]
This is a recording method which allows you to record/copy and edit television broadcasts and so on. You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create Playlists (Video),
etc.
Copyright-protected titles (TV programmes) can be recorded to a
CPRM compatible disc using EXT LINK function.
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD­Video. Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied even if using
a CPRM compatible disc.
After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and
other equipment.
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs. You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Copyright-protected titles cannot be recorded/copied. After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the
disc on DVD players and other equipment.
Note
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the recording.
Play-only discs
Disc type Logo Standard symbol Uses
DVD-Video [DVD-V] High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›] DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
You can play copyright-protected titles if they have been recorded onto
a CPRM compatible disc.
By formatting (> 62) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX
®
/MP3/
JPEG
DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivXDVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3
®
DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG
CD [CD]
DivX
®
JPEG
/MP3/
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW
CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivXCD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3
§
)
®
CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG
Video CD [VCD]
Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW
§
)
SVCD
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Guide
Quick Start
Discs that cannot be played
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for AuthoringDVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (> 85).
Discs recorded with AVCHD format.DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL” DVD-AudioBlu-ray, HD DVDDVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SACD, MV-Disc, PD
DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table. (: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type Disc/Titles recorded
on HDD
Multi-system TV PAL
NTSC
PAL TV PAL
NTSC
NTSC TV PAL
NTSC
§1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 69).
When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that
you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC) (> 69).
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company. A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit. A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
§1
Yes /No
(PAL60)
§2
VQT3C69
13
USB memory information
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP
protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported. Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥ ≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these instructions by [USB] Data that can be played or copied (: Possible, –: Impossible)
File format Playing
DivX
®
§
MP3 Still pictures (JPEG)
≤≤
Copying to HDD ≤≤ Instructions
You can play DivX with a computer onto the USB memory (> 35).
§
Video images of the copyright-protected DivX® contents stored on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)
Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
®
files recorded
You can play and copy to HDD MP3 files recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (> 36, 58).
You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-RAM still pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (> 37, 56, 57).
If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
Note
This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Regarding DivX files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
VQT3C69
14
DivX
Playable media: [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
§1
File format: DivX
Files must have the extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number of folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)
Number of files
Maximum number of files recognizable
§2
: 200 files
Support version
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile V3.0.
Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1 – Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DX50 – 16 k 16 to 720 k 576 (25 fps)
16 k 16 to 720 k 480 (30 fps)
– Aspect Ratio: 10:11, 40:33, 16:11, 12:11, 1:1
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8 – Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital – Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
– Bitrate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3/MPEG),
32 kbps to 448 kbps (Dolby Digital)
– Sampling frequency.: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/
44.1 kHz/48 kHz (MP3/MPEG)/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz (Dolby Digital)
MP3
Playable media: [HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] File format: MP3
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Maximum number of folders (groups or albums) recognizable:
300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root folder)
§2
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable
: 3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates:
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling frequency:
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz ID3 tags: compatible ([HDD] [USB])
If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
§3
Still pictures (JPEG
)
Playable media: [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] File format: JPEG
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Compatible pixels
Between 34k34 and 6400k6400 (Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0) [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Maximum number of folders
§4
recognizable: 300 folders
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Maximum number of files
§4
recognizable§2: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000 files
MOTION JPEG/PROGRESSIVE JPEG: Not supported
§1
Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)
§2
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and other types of files is 4000.
§3
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§4
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display or be playable.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Compatible formats:
ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-
R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks) may not display or be playable.
English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you numbered them.
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be
played.
[HDD] [RAM] Compatible formats: DCF
digital camera, etc.)
§5
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
§5
compliant (Content recorded on a
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
Root
Order of play
(folder=group)
(file=track)
Root
Order of play
002 Folder
003 Folder
004 Folder
Root
Insert label-up.
You can play Music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.
001
001
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
002
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
003
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or taken.
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
Inserting discs
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other equipment.
§
These folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
If a folder name or file name has been input
using other equipment, the name may not be
P0000001.jpg P0000002.jpg
DCIM
P0000003.jpg P0000004.jpg P0000005.jpg
P0000008.jpg P0000009.jpg
XXXXX
XXXX

P0000006.jpg P0000007.jpg
.
jpg
displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data.
Disc care
How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
DO
DO NOT
XXXX
JPEG
DCIM

.jpg
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXX
XXXX


.jpg
.jpg
Guide
Quick Start
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
Note
When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
Inserting the USB memory
Before inserting any USB memory to
Check the orientation of the USB
Insert an USB device while the unit is
Removing the USB memory
Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
automatically selected.
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
Inserting/removing the USB memory
this unit, ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up.
connector and insert it straight in.
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 35, 56, 57).
straight out.
be damaged.
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
DO DO NOT
Handling precautions
Be careful about scratches and dirt.Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked. – Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight. – In very dusty or humid areas. – Near a heater. – Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
when you are not using them.
DO NOT
VQT3C69
15
Watching Television
Basic operations
Numbered buttons
Colour buttons
e.g.
e.g.,
Current page
number
Colour button
bar
Date/time
e.g.
VQT3C69
16
This DVD recorder supports analogue broadcasting, digital terrestrial broadcasting and CATV broadcasting with H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and MPEG-2 codec. But HD broadcasts are down­converted to SD video when this unit receives them.
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
1
1
7
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
REC
ヵユヹヵ
TV
VOL
AV
3
3
2
2
6
6
54
54
9
9
8
8
INPUT
0
0
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
G
OK
OK
MANUAL SKIP
CHAPTER
-10s
EXT LINK
REC MODE
STTL
DISPLAY
CH
PAGE
CH
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
E
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
RETURN
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
TIME SLIP
CH
STATUS
,,,
OK
OPTION
DISPLAY
STTL
TEXT
Preparation
1 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
Select the channel
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the channel of digital broadcasts, digital channel information appears automatically. You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
“D” means digital broadcasts.
Select the channel from Channel List
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the channels you watch often. (> 64, Favourites Edit)
1 While watching TV
Press [OK].
Channel List is displayed.
Channel List
1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 RTL Television 4 SAT.1 5 VOX 6 ProSieben 7 RTL2 8 kabel eins 9 Super RTL
OK
RETURN
123...
1 Das Erste 15:10 Sturm der Liebe 16:00 Tagesschau
All Channels
Sorting Mode Teletext Favourite SelectMulti Video
SELECT
1: Encrypted channels are marked with a key symbol in the
corresponding table.
2: Preview of the selected channel is displayed.
(Digital broadcasts only)
3: Titles of the current programme and next programme are
displayed.
Page + Page -
2 Press the “Blue” button to select the
“Favourite Select”.
The “Favourite Select” screen changes in the following order:
[DVB-C] (and analogue broadcasts) All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio
J Analogue [DVB-T] (and analogue broadcasts)
All Channels (Including Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio J Created Favourites
§1
Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal
§2
Created Favourites > 64, Favourites Edit
§1
J Created Favourites§2 J All Channels
§2
J All Channels
3 Press [3, 4] to select the channel
and press [OK].
Image of the selected channel is displayed. Press [OK] again to exit Channel List if you select digital broadcast channels. It is possible to select the channel with the numbered
buttons too.
To sort the channels in alphabetical order:
Press the “Red” button to change the sorting mode.
For alphabetical sorting mode, skip backwards or forwards by a
letter with [2, 1].
To switch to the Multi Video screen§:
1 Press the “Yellow” button.
The additionally available sub-channels of the selected channel
are displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the sub-channel and press [OK]. 3 Press [OK] again.
Press the “Yellow” button to return to the Channel List.
§
Only for channels broadcasting in Multi Video.
Note
Alphabetical sorting of the created Favourites is not possible in the
Channel List.
The Channel List is not displayed while recording, except with
High-Speed Copy.
Timer Recordings of Multi Video channels always record the main
channel.
“Locked” is displayed on the preview screen when selecting the
programme on which “Child Lock” works.
To show subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information (> 17)
Press [STTL ].
Press again to hide the subtitle.Programmes are recorded with subtitle when you record them with
the subtitle displayed (> 19).
To sh ow
You can enjoy Teletext broadcasting, including news, weather forecasts and subtitles, if this service is provided by the broadcasters. You can check if the programme has Teletext information.
“TXT” is indicated on the digital channel information (> 17).
Basic Teletext viewing
Tele text
(Digital broadcast only)
1 While viewing the programme
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext screen appears.
DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 100 ZDFtext
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
You can use the numbered buttons, the cursor buttons [3, 4, 2, 1] and the coloured buttons.
To exit the screen
Press [TEXT ].
Using Teletext conveniently
(Normal)
(Top)
(Bottom)
Appears when updating is completed.
Broadcast
After performing step 1 (> 16, right column)
Press [OPTION] and press the corresponding colour button.
Reveal hidden data
Displays the hidden messages. (e.g., quiz page answers)
Press the “Red” button.
Press the “Red” button again to hide messages.
2 Select “DVB Multi Audio” or “DVB
Subtitles”.
For DVB Multi Audio
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Sound” menu and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Multi Audio” and press [1].
For DVB Subtitles
1 Press [3, 4] to select the “Other” menu and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Subtitles” and press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the language.
Change the screen size
You can change the Teletext screen size.
Press the “Green” button.
Each press of the “Green” button changes the display.
View temporarily a TV programme while the Teletext screen is being displayed
Press the “Yellow” button.
Press the “Yellow” button again to return to the update page.
View sub page
If there are one or more sub pages, then the corresponding sub pages can be displayed.
1 Press the “Blue” button. 2 Enter a 4-digit number of
You can also select the sub page with [2, 1].It may take some time for searching, during which time you can
Note
The Teletext data received may not be displayed appropriately.If a lot of Teletext information is available, then it may take a while
to be displayed.
Characters of the Teletext can be changed with “Teletext Character
Set” in “Display” of the Setup menu. (> 68)
When there are multiple audio or subtitle in the current channel, you can select a language.
1 Press [DISPLAY].
DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ZDFtext
the desired sub page with the numbered buttons. Sub page is displayed.
watch TV (> above).
DO 13. 05. 11 18:00:00P100 101 ZDFtext
To select a language for DVB multi audio or DVB subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
Digital channel information
While stopped
Press [STATUS ] to show the information screen.
  
1 Das Erste
ZDF-Mor
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted.

1 Programme name and
Broadcast time
2 Channel and Station Name 3 Progress of the current
programme
4 Signal Quality (> below) 5 Category (Favourite > 64) 6 Change the category 7 During scrambled
broadcasting (pay-TV etc.) This is indicated in: White: Can view Yellow: Cannot view Insert CAM with a certified Smart Card (> 6).
8 Te l e te x t ( > 16)
To switch information of the current programme and the next programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ]
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Signal Quality
No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received. No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
Note
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
If the Child Lock message appears
If you set the “Child Lock” in the “Tuning” of the Setup menu (> 66) to prevent your children from viewing inappropriate programmes, the following message may appear.
This channel is locked. Press OK to enter PIN. Approved for children older than XX years.
To unlock this channel temporarily
1 Press [OK].
numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN.
2 Press [OK].
If New Channel Message appears (> 65)
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display, “Auto Setup” starts (all channel settings are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.) The display/hide setting can be changed (> 65, New Channel
Message).
No Signal
NOW
Multi Audio
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
Locked
info
SubtitleTXT

9 NOW:
Information about the current programme NEXT: Information about the following programme
: Programme is broadcast in
multi-channel sound (> left) To change the audio language (> 66, DVB Preferred Language)
; Locked (> 66) < Subtitle (> 16) = To display detailed information
(> below) CAM Upgrade Info (> 72)
again (only when “info ” is displayed).
A confirmation screen appears
and press the
Basic
operations
VQT3C69
17
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Numbered buttons
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 32) for detail information.
OPEN/CLOSE

TV
VOL
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
G
OK
OK
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
EXT LINK
CH
PAGE
3
3
CH
6
6
ShowView
9
9
PROG/CHECK
SLOW/SEARCH
PLAY/x1.3
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
E
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
RETURN
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
(PLAY)
RETURN
DRIVE
SELECT
,,,
OK
OPTION
DRIVE
SELECT
1
1
7
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
REC
AV
2
2
54
54
8
8
0
0
CHAPTER
REC MODE
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Turn on this unit.
Note
During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,
this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/ NTSC) (> 69) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them.
When playing back a title recorded on HDD, ensure that you match
the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting to the recorded title (> 69).
Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
may not always be able to control play as described in these operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK]. ≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
[VCD]
Press [RETURN ].
Note
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press []
when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen and so on.
If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
2 If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
Press the button again to close the tray.
3 Press [1](PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] Play starts from the most recently recorded title. [DVD-V] [VCD] Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
Resume play function
[HDD]
If you play the title that was viewed once, the title is played back from the point you have last stopped. To start playing the title from the beginning, refer to “To play the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 33) Resume play function for discs > 32, Operation during play
Menu operation for other type of contents
DivX (> 35)MP3 (> 36)Still pictures (JPEG) (> 37)Music on HDD (> 34)Music CD (> 34)
VQT3C69
18
Recording television programmes [HDD]
Numbered buttons
e.g.
XP
32:35
SP
65:11
LP
130:25
EP
260:04
Recording Mode
Rec Mode Remain
To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only): Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 68).
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 22) for detail information.
CH
PAGE
CH
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
RETURN
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
TIME SLIP
REC
CH
REC MODE
OK
AUDIO
REC
STTL
DRIVE
SELECT
1
1
7
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
REC
ヵユヹヵ
CH
TV
VOL
AV
3
3
2
2
6
6
54
54
9
9
8
8
INPUT
0
0
SELECT
PAUSE
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
G
OK
MANUAL SKIP
CHAPTER
-10s
EXT LINK
REC MODE
STTL
DISPLAY
SLOW/SEARCH
E
3 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
REC
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD. Data will not be overwritten. You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and the timer recording will begin.
[Analogue] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”
(> 67), you can change the audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (This operation does not affect the audio of the recordings.)
To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording. You can also press [¥ REC] to restart. (Title is not split into separate titles.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
Note
If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
If you record programmes on which “Child Lock” works partially,
PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information (> 17) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
If you try to record recording prohibited programmes, “$” is
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
Basic
operations
This function is only for recording on HDD.
You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Turn on this unit.Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
Press the numbered buttons and press [OK].
“D” means digital broadcasts.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
(> 23)
e.g.,
When recording digital broadcast with subtitle or multiple audio
If a programme to record has subtitle or multiple audio, you can record with subtitle or selected audio.
To record with subtitle
Before start recording, press [STTL ] to
show the subtitle.
If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language (> 17).
Subtitle cannot be switched after recording.
To record with the selected audio
Before start recording, select the desired language for audio (> 17).
To specify a time to stop recording— One Touch Recording
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording time.
You can specify up to 4 hours later.The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00 ^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
This does not work during timer recordings (> 20, 26) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 24).
This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated
for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 71)
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter appears. The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
VQT3C69
19
Timer recording [HDD]
e.g.,
e.g.
Timer Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date
STTL
17:30 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 Das E
Programme Name
HDD
19:30 20:00 20:30
I.Y. SOS
D.I.Y. SOS

Timer icon
Refer to “Advanced timer recording [HDD]” (> 26– 31) for detail information.
DRIVE
SELECT
1
7
DELETE
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
REC
TV
VOL
AV
3
2
6
54
9
8
INPUT
0
SELECT
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
I
D
U
U
E
E
G
G
OK
OK
MANUAL SKIP
CHAPTER
-10s
EXT LINK
REC MODE
CH
PAGE
CH
ShowView
PROG/CHECK
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
RETURN
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
GUIDE
,,,
OK
This function is only for recording on HDD.
You cannot record TV programmes directly to the disc.
Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs. (> 22)
See also “TV Guide system” (> 9) and “Notes for recording” (> 22).
Depending on the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record. You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily, weekly or series programme (> 31) is counted as one programme.)
Note
You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 70).
Using the TV Guide system to make timer recordings
1 Press [GUIDE].
TV Guide:
Landscape
Wed 12.10.
1 Das Erste
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
4:30-5:30
Time:
Das Erste ZDF
RTL Television
ABC VOX
ProSieben
RTL2
SELECT RETURN
4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
Gute Zei
Frühstücksfernsehen Vera
St. Tro Eine himmlische Was für ein Zirkus
Lebe deine
Informerci
+24 hours
OPTION: Free Word Search info
Punkt 6
Guide
Change Display Mode
Rote Rosen
Volle Kanne - Sevice tägl
StarWars - Episode I: Die dunkle
Frauentausch
All Types
Prog. Type
Wed 12.10.11 04:32
All Channels
Deutschland singt
Wege zu
Mein Bab Die Kind
Category
Page Page
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” or “Single Timer Rec.” and press [OK].
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11
OK
RETURN
View
Rec.
Delete
WED 12.10.11. 12:53:00
16:00
SP
Tue 11.10.11 18:03
–“View” > 16, Watching Television – “Delete” > below – “Series Timer Rec.” > 31, [DVB-T] Series recording
All Channels : Das Erste
ZDF-Rote Rosen
Make corrections if necessary using [3, 4, 2, 1] (> 26,
step 3).
If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the
start recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)
Programme Name may not be displayed correctly on the
“Timer Recording” screen. In this case, enter the Programme Name manually (> 50).
3 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated. Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings. Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
To delete a timer recording setting on the TV
Guide screen (Digital broadcast only)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK]. “Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. 3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (> 27)
To release the unit from recording standby
(> 26)
Notes on timer recording (> 27)Change TV Guide Type for Digital broadcasts or
Analogue broadcasts (> 71)
VQT3C69
20
Deleting titles
TV
VOL
SELECT
PAUSE
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
I
D
U
G
OK
OK
MANUAL SKIP
EXT LINK
......
CH
PAGE
3
CH
6
ShowView
9
PROG/CHECK
INPUT
SLOW/SEARCH
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
E
F
F
U
U
N
N
C
C
T
T
I
I
O
O
N
N
M
M
E
E
N
N
U
U
RETURN
-10s
+60s
DIRECT TV REC
Last title
recorded
EXIT
FUNCTION MENU
RETURN
Available
disc space
DRIVE
SELECT
DRIVE
SELECT
1
AV
2 54 8
7
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
,
,,,
OK
SKIP
STOP
STATUS
R
O
T
A
G
I
V
A
N
T
C
E
R
I
D
OPTION
AUDIO
REC
0
CHAPTER
REC MODE
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).
Available disc space after deleting
[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
Available disc space increases after deleting any of these titles
Titl e
Titl e
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video” and
press [OK].
DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles
HDD
10.10.
OK
RETURN
Previous
OPTION
11.10. 2
Page 02/02
Select Info
VIDEO
Previous
Next
PICTURE
Next
MUSIC
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the option menu. Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (> 42,
step 4).
5 Press [OK]. 6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Basic
operations
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
Available disc space does not increase even after
Available disc space increases after deleting
deleting
Title Title
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Later recorded titles
Title Deleted
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
This space become available for recording after all the later recorded titles are deleted.
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
Deleting during play
1 While playing
Press [DELETE ¢].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
VQT3C69
21
Notes for recording
Advanced operations
Select the audio that you want to record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen menu (> 60).
General notes for recording
This unit can record TV programmes or video output from the external equipment to HDD.
You cannot record TV programmes or other contents directly to the disc by pressing [¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording. Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs.
Record to HDD
DVD-R, etc.
HDD
You can record directly to discs (except for DVD-R DL and +R DL)
by EXT LINK (> 25) function.
Audio
Digital broadcasts (Broadcast in multi-channel sound):
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of digital channel information display (> 17)]. However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
Hello Hola
Analogue broadcasts:
Both main (M1) and secondary (M2) audio can be recorded. You can change the audio during playback. (> 32, Changing audio during play)
However in the following cases, select the main audio or the secondary audio to be recorded before recording starts:
– “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”
(The default setting is “On”. > 67)
– Recording sound in LPCM (> 68, Audio
Mode for XP Recording)
– Recording from external equipment (Select
“M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.)
Aspect
Hallo
M1 M2
Hello
Hallo
For recording to discs
Before recording/copying
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] [+R]DL] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary.
Video will not be recorded to DVD-R discs which include JPEG
images.
High speed copy
When copying to discs other than DVD-RAM, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD. (The default setting is “On”. > 67)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X however, the audio and aspect settings (> 67, Aspect for Recording) are necessary before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode
or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
Playing the disc on other DVD players
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] It is necessary to finalise them
(> 63).
You can then play them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
[+RW] It is recommended to create a top menu. (> 63)
§
Copying on DVD-R DL and +R DL
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the first layer to copy a programme, the remainder is copied on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-R DL +R DL
When switching layers: Video and audio may momentarily cut
§
);
Depending on the “Rec for High Speed Copy” setting, aspect ratio of the recorded pictures may vary.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”) [-R] [-RW‹V›]
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to “Automatic” (The default setting is “4:3” > 67), the programme will be recorded in the original aspect used when recording started (including when recording started at a commercial, etc.). Select the correct aspect (“16:9” or “4:3”) if recorded with a different aspect.
In the following case, programme will be recorded in 4:3.
– Recording on [+R] [+RW]
Recording on
longer)” recording modes
[-R] [-RW‹V›] with
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
Second recordable layer
The available space
First recordable layer
Titl e 1
Playback direction
(Inner section of the disc) (Outer section of the disc)
Title 2
Copyright-protected TV programmes
When you recorded copyright-protected TV programmes on HDD, you can transfer the titles from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD­RAM (They are deleted from the HDD).
The copyright-protected titles cannot be copied.It is not possible to use DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-R DL, +R, +RW,
+R DL or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs.
Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied
correctly because of the copy guard.
You cannot copy a Playlist (Video) created from copyright-
protected titles.
VQT3C69
22
Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times
e.g. Disc recorded with Videos
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated. (The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode HDD
XP (High picture
(160 GB)
35 hours 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour 45 min. 1 hour 45 min.
Single-sided
quality recording mode)
SP (Standard
70 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours 35 min. 3 hours 35 min.
recording mode) LP (Long recording
140 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours 10 min. 7 hours 10 min.
mode) EP (Extra long
recording mode) FR (Flexible
Recording Mode)
§1
It is not possible to record/copy or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
§2
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP ( 6 hours )” in the Setup menu (> 67). The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6 hours )” than when using “EP ( 8 hours )”.
§3
You cannot copy in “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§4
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs.
§4
§4
279 hours
hours§2)
(209
279 hours maximum
(6 hours§2)
[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8 hours )” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP ( 6 hours )” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
[HDD]
You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings. The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP ( 8 hours ) that will enable the title to fit in the remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality. For example with a 90-minute title to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc (> 24).All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
DVD-RAM DVD-R
Double-
(4.7 GB)
sided
(9.4 GB)
8 hours
16 hours
(12 hours§2)
8 hours
maximum
16 hours
maximum
DVD-RW
§1
+R
(8.5 GB)
DVD-R DL
+R DL
(8.5 GB)
+RW
(4.7 GB)
8 hours
(6 hours§2)
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45 min.§2)
14 hours 20 min. Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent to
LP mode.
§3
Advanced
operations
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly. Do you want to format the disc now ?
SELECT
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (> 62)
NoYe s
RETURN
OK
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc for play on other equipment.
Finalise the disc so that it can be played on other DVD players. Note: Recording or Editing is not possible after finalising. This may take up to min.
To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
You cannot stop this process once you have started it.If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 63), “Auto-Play Select” (> 63) or “Disc Name” (> 62) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
Finalise
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit. This disc cannot be played on other DVD players without finalising.
VQT3C69
23
Advanced recording
Flexible Rec
Start Cancel
Record in FR mode.
Set rec. time
8 hour 00 min.
Maximum rec. time
8 hour 00 min.
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording time in EP ( 8 hours ) mode.
Remaining time of recording
e.g., HDD
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[HDD]
You can record a title to HDD so that it can then be copied to fit one
4.7 GB disc by automatically selecting optimal quality between XP and EP. The recording mode becomes FR mode.
Preparation
Select the channel or the external input to record.Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and
“min.” and press [3, 4] to set the recording time.
You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
You cannot record more than 8 hours.
5 When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
HDD
REC 0:59
1 DVB
ABC1
L R
Playing while you are recording
[HDD]
Playing from the beginning of the title you are recording—Chasing playback
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
1 Press []. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Playing a title previously recorded while recording— Simultaneous rec and play
You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [OK].
There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen. 2 Press []. 3 If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press
[2, 1] to select “Yes” or “Stop Recording” and press [OK] to stop recording.
Note
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
VQT3C69
24
Recording broadcasts/titles from external equipment
See also “Notes for recording” (> 22 – 23).
Making timer recordings on the television
(e.g., of digital broadcasts)
[HDD]
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a television with a Q Link function (> 39) that you can use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 6).
1 Make timer programming on the TV. 2 Turn off this unit.
The start and end of recording is controlled by the TV. The titles are recorded to the HDD.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Note
When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), recording from television does not start.
Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other. To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 43).
Recording from digital satellite receiver or video equipment
[HDD]
Preparation
Connect a digital satellite receiver or video equipment to the AV2
input terminal of this unit (> 6).
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 69).
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.Check the time on the unit is correct.
Manual recording
1 While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
3 Select the channel or start play on the
other equipment.
4 When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To record programmes from digital satellite receiver using timer programming
Preparation
Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this unit to the
Scart terminal of a VCR or a digital satellite receiver with a 21-pin Scart cable (> 73).
Set “Ext Link” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 70).
Set “AV2 Input” to match the connected equipment in the Setup
menu (> 70).
1 Make timer programming on the
external equipment.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (> 15).
3 Press [EXT LINK].
The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording standby. In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel the setting after recording is finished.
Note
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording finishes.
It is only possible to record copyright-protected TV programmes
onto HDD or CPRM (> 85) compatible DVD-RAM.
This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in
the Setup menu (> 69).
This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other. [HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 43).
When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the
unit’s display), the TV Guide data cannot be downloaded.
While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, video
picture is from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 69).
During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, most
operations on this unit are prohibited ([< OPEN/CLOSE], [Í/I] etc.). When you operate, press [EXT LINK] to cancel EXT LINK standby mode or recording (This unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Advanced
operations
Note
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start during manual
recording, the timer recording will start and the manual recording will stop.
If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
VQT3C69
25
Advanced timer recording [HDD]
Timer Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
StopStart Drive
No.
Date
STTL
Channel
Drive space
New Timer Programme
TUE 11.10.11. 12:54:00
Timer Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStart Channel Date
STTL
22:30 22:00 18. 10. TUE OFF
1 Das E
Programme Name
SP
No.
Channel
ARD
01

Timer icon
Mode
Stop Drive
STTL
HDD
Drive space
SP
OK
22:30
OFF
TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00
Check to make sure “OK” is displayed (> right).
e.g.,
Manually programming timer recordings
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to move through the
items and change the items with [3, 4].
TUE 11.10.11. 12:54:00
HDD
All Channels : Das Erste
When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button
to change the category [e.g., All Channels, TV, Radio, Analogue ([DVB-C]), Favourite (> 64)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to record.
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop
(Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
You can also set Channel (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with the numbered buttons.
Date
[.
Date: Current date up to one month later minus
l
;:
l
Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
l
;:
l
Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
a.
Titles recorded using the same daily, weekly or series timer are bundled and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 33) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
The recording drive is fixed to HDD.You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 27)
ON!)OFF
Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK]. (> 50, Entering text)
STTL (Subtitles) (Digital broadcast only)
AUTO!)OFF When the “Channel” column is set in AV1 or AV2, this setting is unavailable.
You can also press [STTL ] to switch “STTL” setting. When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle (> 66, DVB Preferred Language).
one day
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
Check, change or delete a programme, or resolve overlapping
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer Recording
No.
Press OK to store new programme.
A Icons
F Timer recording standby is activated.
[ This programme is currently recording.
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme with the later start time starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.
You stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording (> 31). The icon disappears the next time the timer programme starts recording.
The programme was recording prohibited so it was not recorded.
X The programme did not complete recording for some reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (> 27).
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining
space.
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to a maximum of one month from the present time) based on the time remaining on HDD.
! : It may not be possible to record because:
there is not enough space left.the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
programmes are overlapped.programmes are deactivated.
C Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> left, step 3)
To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢]. You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
To release the unit from recording standby
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
The timer icon “F” disappears from the timer recording list.You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as even
one timer icon “F” remains in the timer recording list.
Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording standby.
To resolve overlapping
Press [3, 4] to select the programme with and press [OK].If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears (> 27)
If the on-screen instructions do not appear, change or delete the
overlapped programme.
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Remain
DateChannel
New Timer Programme
OK
RETURN
HDD
30:24 SP
Stop DriveStart
TUE 11.10.11. 12:54:00
Drive
Mode
STTL
space
VQT3C69
26
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings. Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
Note
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
To cancel recording when recording
Timer Recording
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
Mode
Stop DriveStartChannel Date 22:3022:00SUN
1 Das E
Programme Name
SP
RENEW
ON
Landscape
TV Guide:
Time:
Wed 12.10.
St. Tro
Eine himmlische Was für ein Zirkus
Frühstücksfernsehen
Vera
Volle Kanne - Sevice tägl
Wege zu
Das Erste ZDF
RTL Television
ABC VOX
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
Deutschland singt
Rote Rosen
Gute Zei
Punkt 6
Mein Bab Die Kind
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
1 Das Erste
4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30
4:30-5:30
All ChannelsAll Types
Portrait
TV Guide:
Wed 12.10.
1 Das Erste
04:30-05:30 05:30-06:30 05:30-06:00 06:00-06:30 06:30-06:40 06:40-07:00
ZDF-Morgenmagazin Rote Rosen Deutschland singt
Frühstücksfernsehen Lebe deine Deutschland singt
All ChannelsAll Types
has already begun
1 While the unit is on
Press [∫].
Stop Recording
Timer recording in progress. Stop this timer recording ? It will be cancelled if you stop.
Stop Recording
SELECT
Cancel
RETURN
OK
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [OK].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if you have set a weekly, daily or series timer recording (> 31), the recording will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears
If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings, the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help you to resolve the overlapping. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Language for digital broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle (Digital broadcast only)
In timer recording of digital broadcast with multi-audio or multi­subtitle, audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow the setting of “DVB Preferred Language” in the Setup menu (> 66).
Auto Renewal Recording
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday/every week using timer recording or Series timer recording (> 31), the unit will record the new programme over the old one.
This function can be used only when daily, weekly or series timer recording is selected.
Notes on timer recording
When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV System (PAL/NTSC) cannot be played unless the TV System is changed in the Setup menu (> 69) or the timer recording has completed or has been cancelled.
Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (> 51).
If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded Recorded
Operations in the TV Guide system
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait view.
Landscape view
e.g.,
Portrait view
e.g.,
Das Erste
ABCRTL Televition
Wed 12.10.11 04:32
Wed 12.10.11 04:32
VOX
Advanced
operations
1 Press [PROG/CHECK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00
STTL
OFF
HDD
All Channels : Das Erste
Note
If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes place.
Playlist (Video) made from programmes that were set for Auto
Renewal Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
To view a programme list for another day
Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.
Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button. You can only jump back to the current date. Past information cannot be viewed.
To browse through the TV Guide list
Press [WXCH].
To see programme information
(Programmes with the symbol) Press [STATUS ].
Additional information (programme name, programme duration, broadcast time, description programmes. Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
Press [STATUS ] again to return to the programme list.
Note
When the TV Guide displays “No info for analogue channels”
Information for analogue channels is not displayed in the TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. Set the timer recording manually or with the S (> 26, 29). To use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type”. (> 71)
When the TV Guide displays the empty TV Guide list
Some digital broadcast may not send programme information. Set the timer recording manually (> 26).
, etc.
) is available for these
HOWVIEW system
VQT3C69
27
Advanced timer recording [HDD]
Free Word Search
Simplified Search Detailed Search
Portrait
:
12.10.11 12:53
12.10.
Search results for
Das Erste
12:00 - 12:30
26.
Rote Rosen
15:00 - 15:15Fri
Rote Rosen
15:00 - 15:15
Rote Rosen
17:00 - 18:00
Rote Rosen
e.g.,
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
10.10.
HDD
MUSIC
PICTURE
VIDEO
11.10.
DolphinsChantal Show
2
Searching for the programme in the TV Guide list
You can search programmes from the TV Guide list based on title information.
Searching by entering words
By entering words, you can search for programmes from the TV Guide list using the programme information.
While the TV Guide list is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
If the option menu appears, press [3, 4] to select “Free
Word Search” and press [OK].
2 Enter the word you would like to
search for and set.
Entry method > 50, Entering text
Detailed Search may result in many hits, but search time will be longer.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search” and press [OK].
Simplified Search:
It searches the programme names only.
Detailed Search:
It searches all the information on the programmes. It might take more time to search the desired programme.
TV Guide
Wed
Das Erste
Wed
28.
Search results appear.
SAT.1RTL Televition
Wed
“ROSEN”
VOX
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When the timer recording setting screen appears, press [OK]. The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
When “Selection Screen” screen appears > 20, Timer recording [HDD], step 2
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
§
It may return to the TV Guide screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
§
Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD
You can search for programmes using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title. 3 Press [OPTION].
If the option menu appears, press [3, 4] to select “TV
Guide Explorer” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Find Titles”
and press [OK].
5 Press [∫] (Set).
When searching using a word other than the title name,
enter a different word. (> 50, Entering text)
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search” and press [OK].
Refer to “Searching by entering words” (> left) for more
information about “Simplified Search” and “Detailed Search”.
7 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When the timer recording setting screen appears, press [OK]. The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
When “Selection Screen” screen appears > 20, Timer recording [HDD], step 2
To return to the previous screen
If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
28
VQT3C69
Selecting the programme from the
All Types Movie
Entertainment
All Types
News
e.g.,
e.g., Programme type, “News” is selected in step 2 of Landscape view.
Input ShowView Number 0-9, and press OK.
ShowView Record
30:24 SP
HDDRemain
TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00
Timer Recording
30:24 SP
HDD
Remain
Mode
Stop Start Channel Date
STTL
Drive
17:00 16:00 18. 10. TUE −−−
1 ARD
Programme Name
HDD
e.g.,
No.
Channel
ARD
01

Timer icon
Mode
Stop
STTL
Drive
HDD
Drive space
SP
OK
17:00
−−−
Check to make sure “OK” is displayed (> 26).
e.g.,
desired programme type or category
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme type, etc.
While the TV Guide list is displayed
1 If you use the TV Guide for Digital broadcast
Press the “Yellow” or “Blue” button.
If you use the TV Guide for Analogue broadcast
Press the “Blue” button.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
desired item.
Using SHOWVIEW number to make timer recordings (Analogue broadcast only)
Entering S can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
HOWVIEW numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
1 Press [ShowView].
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter
the SHOWVIEW number.
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
3 Press [OK].
3 Press [OK].
A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.(Digital broadcast only) When you select the Landscape
view, the unit displays programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected programme type.
TV Guide:
Landscape
Wed 12.10.
Das Erste
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
4:30-5:30
Time:
4:30 5:00 5:30 6:00 6:30
Das Erste
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
ZDF
ZDF-Morgenmagazin
RTL Television
Gute Zei Mein Bab Die Kind
Punkt 6
Frühstücksfernsehen
SAT.1
VOX
ProSieben
RTL2
Eine himmlische Was für ein Zirkus
St. Tro
Lebe deine
Informerci
+24 hours
TIMER REC
OPTION: Free Word Search
info
RETURN
Guide
Wed 12.10.11 04:32
All ChannelsNews
Rote Rosen
Deutschland singt
Volle Kanne - Sevice tägl
Vera
StarWars - Episode I: Die dunkle
Frauentausch
Prog. Type
Change Display Mode
Wege zu
Category
Page Page
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When the timer recording setting screen appears, press [OK]. The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
When “Selection Screen” screen appears > 20, Timer recording [HDD], step 2
Note
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast stations is correct.
TV Guide data of up to 50 channels can be displayed in each
category (All Channels, TV, Radio or Favourite, etc. (> 64)).
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected the programme type or categories
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the categories in step 2 above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
TUE 11.10.11. 12:53:00
SP
Analogue : ARD
Make corrections if necessary using [3, 4, 2, 1]
(> 26, step 3).
When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot
set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme position. After you have entered the information of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button
to change the category [e.g., All Channels, TV, Radio, Analogue ([DVB-C]), Favourite (> 64)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to record.
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings. Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
Advanced
operations
VQT3C69
29
Advanced timer recording [HDD]




Changing the Settings and Editing TV Guide for Analogue broadcasts
Note
To change the settings of the TV Guide for digital broadcasts
(> 71)
Information for digital channels is not displayed in the TV Guide for
the analogue broadcasts.
Changing the settings
You can change the basic settings for your GUIDE Plus+ list.
1 Press [GUIDE]. 2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Postal Code
Host Channel
Data Download
Night Download
OK
RETURN
Setup
XXXXX
EUROS
On
4 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [OK].
Postal Code
Host Channel
Data Download
Night Download
To enter the Postal Code
The entry of the Postal Code is required to receive regional data.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] or the numbered buttons to
enter your Postal Code and press [OK].
To change the Host Channel manually
The GUIDE Plus+ System information is transferred via the Host Channel. The “Auto” setting is recommended. A Host Channel is then set by the system automatically.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the desired station and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].The setting of the Host Channel can take some time.
To check the host channels of your country
> right, Host Channel
To download GUIDE Plus+ data manually
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. The update can take approximately 2 hours. For further information > 10, TV Guide data
download
To select the priority during midnight
The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. If the GUIDE Plus+ data download at 2:50 AM and a timer recording overlap, you can select which will be given priority.
On: Data Download
Timer recording does not start or is interrupted for data download.
Off: Timer programming
GUIDE Plus+ data will not be downloaded. After recording finishes, we recommend you to change this setting to “On”.
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].
Host Channel
(As of December, 2010)
Country Host Channel Display of the Host Channel
Germany Eurosport EUROS Austria Eurosport EUROS
Note
Which channels appear in the GUIDE Plus+ list depends on local
reception conditions. Sub-optimum reception quality can result in missing or incomplete GUIDE Plus+ data.
Editing TV Guide
After performing steps 1-2 (> left)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Editor” and
press [OK].
12.1. Wed 15:05
Name
WDR
***04 ***05
ARD ZDF
***06
OK
RETURN
On/Off
On
On On On BBC1 BBC1
Editor
Reference
TF1 On TF6 On
FR6 ESPRT On Euros
ARD
- - - -
ARTE On
Source
Tuner Tuner Tuner
Tuner Tuner Tuner Tuner Tuner
PAGE+


4 Press [3, 4] to select the desired
“Name” and press [1].
You can also press [WXCH] to browse through the station list.
On/Off To select the stations to be displayed on the
Reference To set the appropriate Reference manually
programme list.
Only stations set to “On” are displayed in the GUIDE Plus+ list.
Press [3, 4] to change the “On/Off” settings and press [OK].
If “No Data” appears in the GUIDE Plus+ list for a station, this station is either not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ data or a GUIDE Plus+ Reference could not be clearly assigned (“----” appears in the Reference field of this station). In this case, set the appropriate Reference manually. You can also manually assign the appropriate Reference even if a station name was not recognized (e.g. ***06).
12.1. Wed 15:05
Landscape
12.1 Wed
15:05~16:05
Time:
ARD ZDF RTL
SAT1
***06
PRO7
MDR
TIMER REC
RETURN
7th Heaven
15:00
Abenteuer...
Ta... ...
Derrick Das Familiengericht Richterin Barbara Sa... ...
7th Heaven
Abenteuerurlaub
+24 hours
GUIDE
Prog. Type
All Types
15:30 16:00 16:30
Fliege-Die Talkshow
Bianca-Wege...
Heute in ...
Das Jugendgericht Richter Alexander...
Gilmore...
No Data
Display Mode
Aktuell
OPTION
Prog. Type
PAGE­PAGE+
...


Press [3, 4] to change the “Reference” setting of the appropriate station and press [OK].
Note
The station names in the Reference list can deviate from the station list.
VQT3C69
30
Note
Existing information can be lost by changing the Postal Code or
Host Channel.
Entry of the wrong Postal Code or Host channel can lead to the
receipt of wrong or no data.
To change the settings, release the unit from recording standby
(> 26).
Instructions/notes on this page are only applicable to those who use the GUIDE Plus+ system for Digital terrestrial broadcasts.
For more information about the GUIDE Plus+ system, refer to “TV
Guide system” and “TV Guide data download” (> 9, 10).
[DVB-T] Series recording
You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
After performing steps 1-2 (> 20)
1 While “Selection Screen” is displayed,
Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer Rec.” and press [OK].
Selection Screen
Tue 11.10.11 12:54
Tue 11.10.11
View Single Timer Rec.
Series Timer Rec.
Delete
OK
RETURN
Series Info
2 Press [OK].
This unit automatically records the programmes that are identified to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.
To check the schedule of the series
Press the “Blue” button in the “Selection Screen“.
Tue 11.10.11 12:54
S
S
S
Series Information
Name Date Contents
5.12. Wed 21:30-22:30
12.12. Wed 21:30-22:30
19.12. Wed 21:30-22:30
26.12. Wed 21:30-22:30
3. 1. Wed 21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
Decameron 2
Decameron 3
Decameron 4
Decameron 1
ABC1
ABC1
ABC1
ABC1
ABC1
R
[DVB-T] Useful functions in GUIDE Plus+ system
Searching using the information of Series recording programmes on HDD
1 During play or while stopped, press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title. 3 Press [OPTION]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “TV Guide Explorer” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select “Series Timer Rec” and press [OK].
> Go to step 2. (> left)
Viewing
1 Press [GUIDE]. 2 Press [OPTION].
While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter
Words” screen is displayed. (> 28, Searching by entering words)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].
The advertisement screen is displayed.
Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set
the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.
To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the
information. To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in standby mode at night.
If advertisement is not displayed correctly, check the correct post
code is entered in the Setup menu (> 71, Post Code).
To change advertisements
Press [3, 4].
advertisement in the TV Guide system
Advanced
operations
:The episode to be recorded
S
The same icon is also displayed on the GUIDE Plus+ list.
:Repeat programme
R
Note
The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode
of the series for 13 weeks.
Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed
as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 33) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
If the same episode has already been set for series timer recording
at a different time or on another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not be selectable in the “Selection Screen”.
If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat
programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.
You cannot change Channel, Date and Drive in the timer recording
setting screen. You can set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes.
“-------” is displayed on a series recording item in the timer
recording list if there will be no episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the series is recorded.
VQT3C69
31
Advanced playback
e.g., English is selected.
Operation during play
Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.Refer to “Playing music” for playing music. (> 34)
Stop
Pause
Search
Skip
Starting from a selected title
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
Slow­motion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
[HDD] : Stopped position for each title is memorized. To play the title from the beginning [HDD] > 33
Discs : Only previous stopped position is memorized. The position is cleared if the tray is opened. If [] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared in some cases.
([VCD] and DivX) The position is cleared if the
unit is turned off.
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.Audio is heard during first level search
forward. DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
Each press increases the number of skips.DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning
of the title currently playing.
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
[HDD] and DivX
e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]
Other discs
Input a 2-digit number e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
This works only when
stopped (the screen on the right is displayed on the television) with some discs.
[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen is displayed on the television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal. Press again to return to normal speed.
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.The unit will pause if slow-motion play is
continued for approximately 5 minutes (excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
Frame-by­frame
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Skipping the specified time (Time Slip)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
(This function does not work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Create Chapter
(> 42, Chapter) [HDD] [RAM]
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
Each press shows the next frame. Press and hold to change in succession
forward or backward.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
1 Press [TIME SLIP]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
and press [OK].
Play skips the specified time. Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
This automatically disappears after approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.
-
5 min
1-minute skip function:
Press [MANUAL SKIP +60s].
Each time you press, play skips forward approximately 1 minute.
10-second skip back function:
Press [MANUAL SKIP -10s].
Each time you press, play skips backward approximately 10 seconds.
Press [CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed. Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a
chapter.
Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK
standby.
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast
LR>L>R ^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
L R
e.g., “L R” is selected
[DVD-V]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack language (> 60, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack
Note
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases. When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68).
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting
is “On” > 67).
1 ENG Digital 3/2.1ch
VQT3C69
32
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles PICTURE/MUSIC
Table Display
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display” “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
10.10.
HDD
MUSIC
PICTURE
VIDEO
11.10.
DolphinsChantal Show
2
(in Thumbnail Display)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles
ARD 10.10. FRI
007
- - - - - -
HDD
- - -
ARD 18.10. SAT
009
ARD 11.10. SAT
008
MUSIC
PICTURE
VIDEO
(in Thumbnail Display)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [OK].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles screen only).
e.g., [HDD]
5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]
e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
[ Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
t Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is damaged etc.]
Title with copyright protection (> 85, CPRM)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played ([HDD] only)
Titles that are restricted from viewing by Child Lock function ([HDD] only) (> 66)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD] “Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
e.g.,
Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 69).
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.” The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback
of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to
another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be cancelled.
To play grouped titles [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles. Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press
[OK].
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK]. Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group
are released.
When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from
the group.
Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
10.10.
11.10.
DolphinsChantal Show
Previous
OK
OPTION OPTION
RETURN
Page 02/02
Select
2
Previous
VIDEO
PICTURE
Next
To change the group name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK]. 4 Enter the name. (> 50, Entering text)
Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
MUSIC
HDD
Next
Dolphins Dolphins 2
Previous
OK
RETURN
ARD 18.10. SAT ARD 11.10. SAT
Page 01/01
Select
Info
Create Group
Release Grouping
VIDEO
Next
Advanced
operations
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.
Select the item marked with and press [OK] to display the bundled titles.
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
Note
This function is only available for Videos and not available for music or still pictures.
To play the title from the beginning
[HDD]
You can start playing back the title from the beginning while the resume play function is activated.
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and press
[OK].
VQT3C69
33
Playing music
To play music CD
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
SELECT
RETURN
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
The music CD starts playing back.
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. Playback continues.
To play music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD (> 58)
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OK].
You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
Stop
Pause
Search
Skip
Repeat Play
[HDD]
Sort
[HDD]
Properties
[HDD] [CD]
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.If [] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared.
Discs: The position is cleared if the tray is
opened or the unit is turned off.
[HDD] The position is cleared if the unit is turned
off.
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps. Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play. Audio is heard during all levels of search.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip to the track you want to play. Each press increases the number of skips.
You can select the item which you want to repeat.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”
and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
You can change the order of the Album View alphabetically.
While Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and
press [OK].
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].
While Track View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press
[OK]. To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
VQT3C69
34
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Note
You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
Disc
View Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3 )
Play Video ( DivX )
USB device
Video ( DivX ) Picture ( JPEG ) Music ( MP3 )
USB device
View Pictures ( JPEG ) Start Slideshow Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )
0 : Resume play function (> 32)
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
You cannot select folders that contain no compatible files.
Showing the menu screen
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Insert the disc. 2 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK]. e.g., [CD]
Copy Music ( MP3 )
[USB]
1 Insert the USB memory. 2 Press [3, 4] to select a file type and press [OK].
e.g.
3 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [OK]. e.g., Picture
Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU
Display
e.g. selecting a file to play
1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu. 2 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK].
[USB]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the item (“Play Video ( DivX )”, “View
Pictures ( JPEG )” or “Play Music ( MP3 )”) and press [OK].
Playing DivX video contents
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
®
is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX DivX Certified
®
device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
1 Show DivX Menu screen.
(@ left, Showing the menu screen)
OK
RETURN
No.
001 ABC.avi
Folder1 : 00025
Title Name
Page 001/001
Tree
Total Title : 001
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Files are treated as titles.Press [1] (PLAY) if the DivX Menu screen is not displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title. You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Note
Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust the aspect through the TV.
Successive play is not possible.Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
Using the tree screen to find a folder
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display the tree screen.
Advanced
operations
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Folder
12.02.2009 Image001
Image002 Image003 Image004 Image005 Image006 Image007 Image008 Image009 Image010
DATA1 DATA2
OK
RETURN
F 1/21
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
VQT3C69
35
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
10 alphanumeric characters
DivX Registration screen before registration
001 Both Ends Freezing 002 Lady Starfish 003 Life on Jupiter 004 Metal Glue 005 Paint It Yellow 006 Pyjamamama 007 Shrimps from Mars
1
1 : My favorite
2 3 4 5 6 7
Total Track
Tree
G 1 T 1 TOTAL 1/111
MP3 Menu
CD
0 9
Number
Group No.
Prev.
Selected group
G: Group No. T: Track No. in the group TOTAL:
Track No./Total tracks in all groups
Tree
G 7/25
001 My favorite 001 Brazilian pops 002 Chinese pops 003 Czech pops 004 Hungarian pops 005 Liner notes 006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
MP3 Menu
CD
Number
G 8 T 14 TOTAL 40/111
MP3 music
0 9
Regarding DivX VOD content
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX Certified purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(> 71, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
Setup
Tuning
Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others
After playing DivX VOD content for first time, the registration code
is not displayed.
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this content.
Cancel the unit’s registration
(> 71, DivX Registration) Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” in “DivX Registration”. Use the deregistration code to cancel the registration in www.divx.com.
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times
Some DivX VOD contents can only be played a set number of times. When you play this content, the number of times already played and initially playable number of times is displayed.
The remaining number of plays decreases each time a programme
is played. However, when playing from the point where play was previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not decrease due to the resume play function.
Note
Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored on
USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal.
®
device must be registered in order to play
DivX Registration
You must register this unit to play protected DivX videos. The registration code is necessary to register this unit.
Registration Code : XXXXXXXXXX
Please register at www.divx.com/vod/
OK
RETURN
Playing Music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or copying.
1 Show MP3 Menu screen.
(> 35, Showing the menu screen)
Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected track.
0” indicates the track currently playing.You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Using the tree screen to find a group
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
VQT3C69
36
You cannot select groups that contain no compatible files.
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Playing still pictures
Album View screen
Regarding Album View screen > right
Sample pictures > right
e.g., HDD
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
1 Show Album View screen.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (> 35, Showing the menu screen) [HDD] [RAM] While stopped 1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
001
- - -
OK
RETURN
Previous
002
Total 20--.--.--
- - -
Page 01/01
OPTION
VIDEO
MUSIC
PICTURE
- - -
Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006Sample
- - -
Next
Slideshow
Select All Playlist View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [OK].
You can also select album with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
Album Name
103__DVD
0001
0002 0003 0004
0005 0006 0007 0008
0009
---- ---- ----
Page 001/001
Previous
OK
OPTION
RETURN
PICTURE
Next
Slideshow
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons. e.g.,
5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.Useful functions during still picture play (> 38)
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM. You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 46).
[HDD] [RAM]
Grouped by date
002
Date: 10.10. 2010
Total 68
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Album
002
Zoological park
Total 24 10.10. 10
Shooting date/Number of pictures/ Album name
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC
etc., the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
Note
Sample pictures
Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on HDD of this unit. You can
play them back or start slideshow (
>
below) with them. If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection” and then delete them. (> 46)
Start Slideshow
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval with favourite music.
1 While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is
displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1](PLAY).
You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and then press [OK].
To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album. 2 Press [;].
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel the selection.
3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums. 4 Perform step 2.
To select all albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [] in step 1. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 3 Perform step 2.
[USB]
To start Slideshow on the menu screen:
1 Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, and press [OK].
Note
Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is
played with Slideshow. Refer to “Slideshow Settings” to turn off or change the Background Music. (> 38)
Advanced
operations
VQT3C69
37
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
Shooting date
e.g., HDD
Useful functions during still picture play
Slideshow Settings
While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is displayed (> 37)
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow
Settings” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture
Settings” or “Background Music Settings” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1]
to select the setting. After finishing settings, press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and press [OK].
Picture Settings
Picture Settings
Please set the following functions.
Display Interval Repeat Play Random
Display Interval: Selects the desired interval. (“Normal”,
Repeat Play: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected
Random: Selects “On” to play pictures in the selected
Background Music Settings
Background Music Settings
Please set the following functions.
Background Music Random Music Selection
Background Music:
Random: Selects “On” to play Background Music at random. Music Selection:
Note
Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as
the Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still images on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the music is not played.)
“Sample Music” cannot be deleted or changed to other files.“Music Selection” setting turns back to “Sample Music” when
removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded or deleting specified Background Music files.
DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.“Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT” or “Zoom in/Zoom out” does not work
during Slideshow.
Normal
On
Off
SELECT
SetSet Cancel
RETURN
“Long” or “Short”)
album repeatedly.
album at random.
On
Off
Sample Music
SELECT
SetSet Cancel
RETURN
Selects “On” to play Slideshow with Background Music. Selects “Off” to play Slideshow without Background Music.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection” and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of
Background Music and press [OK]. “Sample Music” is Background Music pre-
installed on HDD.
3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for
Background Music and press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT
While playing
1 Press [OPTION]. 2Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate
RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
OK
RETURN
Rotation information will not be stored.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures – When disc or album is protected – When played on other equipment – When copying pictures – When changing date
Zoom in/Zoom out
While playing
1 Press [OPTION]. 2Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in”
and press [OK].
To return the picture to its original size, press
[3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press
Rotate RIGHT Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
RETURN
[OK].
When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.The enlargement information will not be stored.The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures
smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.
Properties
While playing
Press [STATUS ] twice.
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006 Date 1. 1. 2011 No. 3 / 9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
VQT3C69
38
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control” or Q Link.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details.
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2010) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation
1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable (> 7), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (> 7).
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 69). (The default setting is “On”.)
What you can do with “HDAVI Control” and Q Link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
What is Q Link?
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation
Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(> 6).
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic. For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.
Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]
§2
, [1](PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
§2
, [1](PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [ShowView], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
Power off link
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording. Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc. When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.
Direct TV Recording
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work.
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
Recording starts. The titles are recorded to the HDD.
To stop recording
Press [].If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the Direct TV Recording may stop.When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 25), Direct TV Recording is unavailable.
§1
[VIERA]Link] This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
§2
This button is available only when this unit is on.
§3
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents from where playback started. In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
Note
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
§1
Advanced
operations
VQT3C69
39
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
Menu Drive Select
Control Panel
Top Menu
FUNCTION MENU
e,g.,
P
p
Control Panel
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
[VIERA]Link]
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions. You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control. The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
§1
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV remote control.
If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].
About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 5, 41, 68).
Pause live TV programme
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
§2
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
This unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (> below) and press [OK].
The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
(> 41, To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV)
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.
1 Press [OPTION].
Note
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Channel List
Switch to TV
Control Panel Control Panel is displayed (> below).
FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed (> above).
Top Menu [DVD-V] Top menu is displayed (> 18).
Menu [DVD-V] Menu is displayed (> 18).
Standby Settings “Standby Settings” screen is displayed
Drive Select Select the HDD or DVD drive
Slideshow “Album View” screen is displayed (> 37).
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG) Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Zoom in (JPEG) Zoom out (JPEG)
§1
§3
§3
Channel List is displayed (> 16)
Displayed when watching with the tuner of this unit. It will return to the TV picture.
(> 70).
Rotate the still picture (> 38).
Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 38).
VQT3C69
40
Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control. Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 (> above). The Control Panel is displayed (> right). When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
While playing still pictures
–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
§1
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
§2
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
§3
Displayed only when selecting “View” in the FUNCTION MENU.
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 69).
Search
Play
ause
Sto
Exit
Search
Convenient functions
FUNCTION MENU Display
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions quickly and easily. If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power on. (> 68)
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of disc.
HDD
FUNCTION MENU
Playback
Recording Delete
Copy
View
Others Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Remain
Video Picture Music
30:00 SP
2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
View
Others Drive Select
OK
RETURN
If you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous
screen.
Remain
Video
Picture Music
30:00 SP
3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [OK].
Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION
MENU Display” about each function. (> 5)
To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1 Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.
2 Turn on this unit and press [WXCH]
to select the channel.
3 When you want to pause the TV programme
Press [PAUSE LIVE TV].
HDD
4 DVB
ABC
L R
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can turn off this icon (> 68, Pause Live TV Icon).
4 When you want to resume
Press [1](PLAY).
The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode
(> 23) regardless of the recording mode and the drive selected before starting saving.
At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
Advanced
operations
To exit the FUNCTION MENU
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Operation during Pause Live TV
Search
Pause
Quick View
Slow­motion
Press [6, 5].
Press [;].
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).
Press again to return to the normal speed.
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps. Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Stop Pause Live TV
1Press [∫]. 2Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Note
The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
The Pause Live TV function does not work
– when the clock is not set – while recording – while timer recording – while EXT LINK recording, etc.
Audio or Subtitle cannot be switched during resume play.The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.
The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
“DVB Multi Audio” and “DVB Subtitles” of on-screen menu cannot
be switched during Pause Live TV.
If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
“Pause Live TV” does not work while viewing recording prohibited
programmes.
VQT3C69
41
Editing titles/chapters
Editing
Title View screen
Refer to “Title operations” (> 43).
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance (> 33)
Playing still pictures (> 37)To play music recorded on HDD (> 34)
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 33) > below
To search programmes on TV Guide (> 28)
e.g.,
Refer to “To play the title from the beginning [HDD]” (> 33).
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Chapter View
008 11.10. Dinosaur
HDD
0:31.24
Chapter View screen
Refer to “Chapter operations” (> 43).
VQT3C69
42
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.) [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a Playlist (Video) (> 44).
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 67)
“Automatic”:
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter start points on them automatically. Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording
Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at approximately 5-minute interval.
The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
– Titles: 499 – Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title (Depends on the state of recording.) [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] – Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles) – Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254) (Depends on the state of recording.)
Note
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount of free space decreases. We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded programmes.
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Turn the unit on.Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).
1 During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles
HDD
OK
10.10. 11.10.
Previous
OPTION
RETURN
008
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
VIDEO
MUSIC
PICTURE
Select Info
Next
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
3 Press [OPTION]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
Enter Title Name
Play from beginning
Delete Properties
Edit
Find Titles Create Group Release Grouping Chapter View Table Display All Titles PICTURE/MUSIC
If you select “Chapter View”
Set up Protection Cancel Protection Partial Delete Change Thumbnail Divide Title
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play > Press [OK]. To e dit > Step 6.
VIDEO
To show other pages/Multiple editing (> left)
6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter Combine Chapters Title View
You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Title operations
Properties
No.
Channel
Date
026
ARD
10.10.2011
Time Rec time
12:19 0:30 (SP)MON
Dinosaur
Approved for children older than 16 years.
l
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
Start
Next
Finish
0:43.21
PLAY
008
End
- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -
Start End
HDD
VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Change Thumbnail
Change
Finish
0:00.00
- -:- -.- -
Change
HDD

008
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
Preview
Finish
0:43.21
PLAY
008
Divide
HDD
VIDEO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
Create
Finish
0:43.21
PLAY
008
HDD
After performing steps 1–4 (> 42)
Delete
§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete
titles.
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 21).
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown. Press [OK] to exit the screen.
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(> below, For your reference)
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)
§
Multiple editing is possible.
You can give names to recorded titles. (> 50, Entering text)
[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
§
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
§
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title View.
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play. 2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the point you want to change.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK]. 3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10 seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the title.
Note
The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 85) of the original title.Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit
HDD
007 008
ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10.
VIDEO
Editing
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–6 (> 42)
Delete Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
Create Chapter
[HDD] [RAM] (> below, For your reference)
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
Use Search (> 32), Time Slip (> 32) to find the desired point.To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 32) and Frame-by-frame (> 32).To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the title.
VIDEO
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
VQT3C69
43
Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video)
Playlists Playlist View ( Video )
- -
- -
Create
HDD
- -
- - - -
- -
Playlists Playlist View ( Video )
- -
- -
Create
HDD
- -
- -- -
- -
You can arrange the chapters (> 42) to create a Playlist (Video).
Title Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter
Playlist (Video)
Chapter
Chapter
Copying (> 51) a Playlist (Video) will create a title. Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use
much capacity.
Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source
titles and source chapters.
You cannot create or edit Playlists (Video) while recording or
copying.
[HDD] [RAM] The maximum number of items on a disc:
– Playlists (Video): 99 – Chapters in Playlists (Video): Approx. 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
Creating Playlists (Video)
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
Turn the unit on.Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection). Playlists (Video) must be made in accordance with the encoding
system currently selected in “TV System” (> 69).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
View
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
[HDD]
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
Remain
Playlists
Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup
30:00 SP
VIDEO
PICTURE
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [OK].
VIDEO
PICTURE
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
HDD
Source Title
001
Source Chapter
001
Chapters in Playlist
OK
RETURN
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
002
002 003
---
OPTION
VIDEO
Page 001/001
------
Page 001/001
---
Page 001/001
---------
Press RETURN to finish.
Playlists
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a Playlist (Video) and press [OK].
Press [3] to cancel.
HDD
Source Title
001
Source Chapter
001
Chapters in Playlist
OK
RETURN
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
002
002 003
OPTION
VIDEO
Page 001/001
------
Page 001/001
---
Page 001/001
------------
Press RETURN to finish.
Playlists
You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK] (> 43, Create Chapter).
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [OK].
HDD
Source Title
001 002
Source Chapter
001
Chapters in Playlist
OK
RETURN
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
002 003
VIDEO
------
---
------------
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Playlists
Press [3] to select other source titles.Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN ].
All the selected scenes become the Playlist (Video).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
VQT3C69
44
Editing and playing Playlists (Video)/
01
Create
- -- -
- -- -- -
12.10. SUN 0:30
HDD
Playlists Playlist View ( Video )
Playlist View ( Video ) screen
Refer to “Playlist (Video) operations”. (> right)
Playlists Chapter View
11 12.11. SUN 0:11
001
--- ---
--- ------ ---
002
HDD
0:19.36
0:10.24
Chapter View screen
Refer to “Chapter operations”. (> right)
Properties
Dinosaur
Playlists Move Chapter
Previous Page 01/01 Next
11 12.11. SUN 0:11
001
--- ---
--- ------ ---
--- ------ ---
002
HDD
0:10.240:10.24
0:19.36
VIDEO
chapters
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
[HDD]
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
Playlist (Video).
To start play > Press [OK]. To edit > Step 5.
VIDEO
PICTURE
To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
e.g. [HDD]
Playlist (Video) operations
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the Playlists (Video) are lost and cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
Create
Playlist (Video) information (e.g., total time and date) is shown.
Press [OK] to
exit the screen.
(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–8)
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Copy
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press [OK].
The copied Playlist (Video) becomes the
newest one in “Playlist View ( Video )” screen.
Enter Name
You can give names to Playlists (Video). (> 50, Entering text)
[HDD] [RAM]
Change
(> 43, Change Thumbnail)
Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible.
No.
Date Total10002
11.10.2011 TUE
Chapters 0:30.53
Create
Copy
Delete
Properties
Edit
Chapter View
PICTURE
Enter Name
Change Thumbnail
If you select “Chapter View”
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play > Press [OK]. To edit > Step 7.
VIDEO
To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 42)
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Add Chapter
Move Chapter Create Chapter Combine Chapters Delete Chapter Playlist View
Chapter operations
[HDD] [RAM] After performing steps 1–7 (> left) Editing chapters in a Playlist (Video) does not modify the source
titles and source chapters.
Add
(> 44, Creating Playlists (Video), Step 5–7)
Chapter
Move Chapter
Create
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position to insert the chapter and press [OK].
(> 43, Create Chapter)
Chapter
Combine
(> 43, Combine Chapters)
Chapters
Delete Chapter
§
Multiple editing is possible.
(> 43, Delete Chapter) The Playlist (Video) itself is deleted if you
§
delete all the chapters in it.
Editing
You can go back to Playlist View ( Video ).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
VQT3C69
45
Editing still pictures and music
Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings (> 37, 38)
Album (still picture) and picture operation (@ right)
Switch to Playlists (Picture) (> 48)
Properties
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album View
Delete Pictures
Album (still picture) and picture operation (> right)
You can go back to Album View.
_
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)
You can edit pictures and albums.You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.[RAM] Release protection (> 62, Setting the protection).
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Editing an album:
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
To edit the album
To edit still picture
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
VQT3C69
46
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
RW and USB memory.
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Select the album to be edited and press [OPTION].
When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
Editing a still picture:
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
To select all albums
Press []. After confirmation message appears, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”.
and press [OK].
(e.g., [HDD])
Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Copy to DVD
Playlist View
VIDEO/MUSIC
(e.g., [HDD])
Delete Album
Change Date
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album (still picture) and picture operation
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
Delete Pictures
Delete Album
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)
§
Change
§
Date
[HDD] [RAM]
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM]
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM]
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Add Pictures
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM]
Copy to
§
DVD
[HDD]
Copy to
§
HDD
[RAM]
§
Multiple editing is possible. [Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
§
Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
When deleting an album, files other than the
still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This does not apply to folders under the album concerned.)
[-R] Available space does not increase even
after pictures are deleted.
You can change the date of the picture.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press
[3, 4] to change.
2 Press [OK].
You can give names to albums. (> 50, Entering text) Album names input using this unit may not be
displayed on other equipment.
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from
§
accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR P
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
§
press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected. Even if the protection setting is used by this
unit to protect an album, the album may be deleted by another unit.
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown. To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”
and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to add and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
[OK].
If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
Select the still picture you want to add and press [OK].
If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and
press [OK].
If you want to continue copying, select
“Yes” and go to step 2.
Only for “Create Album” 5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and
press [OK].
If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (> 50, Entering text)
If “No” is selected:
The album name is automatically given.
For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
[-R]
Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on
which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.
Album Name
0001
103
0002
Note
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to
play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 33)
Playing still pictures (> 37)
Album and track operation (> below)
Useful functions during music play (> 34)
You can go back to Album View
Album and track operation (> below)
Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,
“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.
[RAM]
“Add Pictures” is available only for the folders conforming to DCF.
If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection”
and then delete them. (> 46)
“Sample Music” is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.
Editing music
[HDD]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.
2 Editing an album:
Press [3, 4] to select the album and press [OPTION].
Editing a track:
1 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
To edit the album (Music)
Delete Album
Enter Album Name
Repeat Play Setting
Track View
Sort
VIDEO/PICTURE
> below
To edit the track (Music)
Delete Track
Properties
Enter Track Name
Enter Artist Name
Repeat Play Setting
Album View
Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or
“Music”.
[RAM] [-R] (JPEG) “Music” is not displayed.
4 Press [OK]. 5 Deleting an album
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [DELETE ¢].
Deleting a still picture or track
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
which contains the still picture or track to delete and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture
or track and press [OK].
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the option menu. Refer to option menu operations
– for Still pictures > 46, step 3 – for Music @ left, step 3
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture only]
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture only]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Editing
Useful functions during music play (> 34)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album and track operation
After performing steps 1-3 (> above)
Delete Album Delete Track
Enter Album Name Enter Track Name
Enter Artist Name You can edit the artist name of the track.
Note
When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the recorded contents
are lost and cannot be restored. Make
certain before proceeding.
You can give names to albums and tracks. (> 50, Entering text)
(> 50, Entering text)
VQT3C69
47
Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Picture)
Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture
Album 1 Album 2
Playlist (Picture)
Still picture Still picture Still picture
Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )
- -
HDD
- - - -
PICTURE
VIDEO
Playlists Playlist View ( Picture )
- -
- -
Create
HDD
- -
- - - -
- -
You can arrange favourite still pictures in albums stored on HDD to create a Playlist (Picture).
Copying (> 56) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album. (Background Music cannot be copied.)
Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t
use much capacity.
Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) does not modify the
source albums or source still pictures.
You cannot create or edit Playlists (Picture) while recording or
copying.
The maximum number of Playlists (Picture):
– Playlists: 99 – Pictures in a Playlist (Picture): Approx. 3000
Creating Playlists (Picture)
[HDD]
You can create Playlists (Picture) with Background Music.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
View
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Remain
Playlists
Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup
30:00 SP
6 Press [2, 1] to select the still picture
you want to add to a Playlist (Picture) and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
HDD
001 Date :25.5.2009
Source Albums
001
Source Pictures
0001
Pictures in Playlist
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Create
002
0002 0003
----
View
PICTURE
Page 001/001
------
Page 001/001
----
Page 001/001
------------
Press RETURN to finish.
Playlists
7 Press [OK]. 8 Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the still picture and press [OK].
HDD
001 Date :25.5.2009
Source Albums
001
Source Pictures
0001
Pictures in Playlist
----
OK
RETURN
Create
002
0002
----
PICTURE
Page 001/001
------
Page 001/001
0003
----
Page 001/001
--------
Playlists
Press [3] to select other “Source Albums” and repeat steps
5–8 to add pictures in other albums.
9 Press [RETURN ]. 10 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” if you
want to name the Playlist (Picture).
Create
Input playlist name ?
Yes
SELECT
OK
(> 50, Entering text)
No
RETURN
11 Select the Background Music if you
want to change Background Music.
If “No” is selected, Sample Music is set for Background
Music.
Create
Sample music is now selected. Change background music?
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [OK].
VIDEO
PICTURE
5
Press [2,1] to select an album (a folder) in “Source Albums” and press [4].
Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then skip
to step 8.
Press [3] to cancel.
HDD
001 Date :25.5.2009
Source Albums
001
Source Pictures
0001
Pictures in Playlist
----
OK
RETURN
Create
002
0002 0003
----
Press RETURN to finish.
Page 001/001
------
Page 001/001
----
--------
PICTURE
Page 001/001
Playlists
VQT3C69
48
Yes
SELECT
OK
No
RETURN
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background
Music and press [OK]. “Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on
HDD.
3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music
and press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”. Background Music on Playlists (Picture) is specified for
each Playlist (Picture). (> 49)
All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Editing Playlists (Picture)/still pictures
Playlist (Picture) operations (@ right)
right
Album (still picture) and picture operation (> 46)
Creating, editing and playing Playlists (Video) (> 44)
Properties Add Pictures Move Pictures Delete Pictures
Playlist View
Still picture operations (@ right)
You can go back to Playlist View ( Picture ).
[HDD]
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button
to select “PICTURE”.
4 Editing a Playlist (Picture):
Select the Playlist (Picture) to be edited and press [OPTION].
Editing a still picture:
1 Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains
still pictures to edit and press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
5 Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
To edit the Playlist (Picture)
Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings
Delete
Edit
Copy to DVD
Album View
VIDEO
Create
Copy
Enter Playlist Name
Playlist (Picture) operations
[HDD]
After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Delete
§
Copy to
§
DVD
(> 37, Start Slideshow, Steps 1-2) You cannot select multiple Playlists
(Picture) or all Playlists (Picture).
(> 38, Slideshow Settings) Slideshow Settings are retained only for
the specified Playlist (Picture).
Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background
Music when inserting Music CD.
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. Once deleted, the Playlists (Picture) are lost and cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
For copy to DVD-RAM
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
[-R]
Use blank discs or unfinalized discs on
which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.
Create
§
Copy
Enter Playlist
(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–
11)
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press [OK].
The copied Playlist (Picture) becomes the
newest one in “Playlist View ( Picture )” screen.
You can give names to Playlists (Picture). (> 50, Entering text)
Name
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Still picture operations
[HDD]
After performing steps 1–5 (@ left)
Properties
(> 46, Album (still picture) and picture operation)
Editing
To edit still picture
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Add Pictures
Move Pictures
Delete Pictures
§
Multiple editing is possible.
§
(> 48, Creating Playlists (Picture), Step 5–9)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position to insert the picture and press [OK].
Playlists Move Pictures
HDD
Playlist Name
Playlist 01
0002
0001
0:10.24
Previous Page 001/001 Next
OK
RETURN
---- ----
---- -------- ---
---- -------- ---
PICTURE
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
VQT3C69
49
Entering text
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Press the “Red” button or “Green” button to select character type and press [OK].
“Standard Characters”: (> left, Alphabet characters, etc.) “Other Characters”: (> below, Umlaut characters, accented characters, etc.)
5
J K L
S
_
Enter Title Name
1 2 3 4 5
A B C a
D E F d
G H I g
6 7 8 9 0 b c   e f /  % h i  $
*
&
Top Menu Preview
1
2
3
4
Standard Characters Other Characters
Chapter 1_
Chapter 1
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc. Also, you can search desired programmes on TV Guide by entering key words. (Free Word Search/Find Titles) (> 28)
1 Show Enter Title Name screen etc.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name”. (> 26, Manually programming timer recordings, step 3)
Free Word Search
Select “Free Word Search”. (> 28, “Searching by entering words”, step 2)
Find Titles
Select “Find Titles”. (> 28, “Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 5)
Title
Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 42, step 4)
Playlist (Video)
Select “Enter Name”. (> 45, step 5)
Playlist (Picture)
Select “Enter Playlist Name”. (> 49, step 5)
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 46, Editing still pictures (JPEG), step 3)
Album (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 47, Editing music, step 3)
Disc
Select “Disc Name”. (> 62, Providing a name for a disc, step 1)
Favourite 1–4
Press the “Red” button. (> 64, To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)
Enter Title Name
_
Top Menu Preview
Delete
Add to List
Name List
Set
SELECT
OK
Standard Characters Other Characters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8
9
0
RETURN
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GH INOg
JKL j
m
M
PQRSp
TUV t
WXY Z w
.
,
!?
"
Space
67890 bc
*
ef/ %
&
hi $ kl@
o[
n ]
_
qrs( )
-
uv{ }
xyz
|
\
:
^
;
`
'
1
¢¡£¤¥
2
-
«¬
®
3
µ¶·
¸
4
¿Á
Â
5
ÉÊË
Ì
Ó
ÔÕÖ
6
ÝÞßÐ áà
7
çèé
ê
8
стуфх
9
û
ü
þý
0
¦§¨©ª ¯°± ² ¹º»¼½
ÃÄÅÆ
НОПАС
ØÙ
× Ú
вгдеж
ëìí î
ö÷ø ú
ÿ
Space
³
´
¾
Ç
È Ò
Û
Ü
ð
ï
ù
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row. 2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”. 3 Press [OK].
To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press [OK].
7
77
M
6
P Q R
7
N O
3 Press [∫] (Set).
To end partway
Press [RETURN ]. Text is not added.
To add a name to the list
You can add frequently used names and recall them later. Maximum number of added names: 20 Maximum number of characters per name: 44 After entering the name (steps 1-2).
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].
You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].
Press [RETURN ] to cancel.
To recall an added name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [OK].
To delete an added name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted. 3 Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK]. 4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK]. 5 Press [RETURN ].
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu after finalisation (> 63). When entering a title name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview” window.
VQT3C69
50
Note
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.The number of characters that can be entered depends on what
kind of things you name.
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] Advanced Copy
Features Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.
Copy direction HDD > DVD
DVD > HDD
High speed mode copy
§1
Changing recording mode – Finalise
§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode
Copying Playlists (Video)
§4
Are chapters maintained? Are thumbnails maintained? Recording or Playing while Copying
§1
To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. > 67). However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.
––
§5
§6
––
Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).Titles that contain many deleted segments.Titles that have been copied to the HDD from a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video).
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed ) ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
§2
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
against degradation of picture quality.) [+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3
You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”. If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (>63
§4
You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours. When you copy a Playlist (Video), it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5
[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6
Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7
When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8
Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.) – You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying. – You cannot play a Playlist (Video) while copying titles with copyright protection (> 22). – Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
Recording
Recorded
Mode
XP
1 hour
SP
LP EP(6 hours) EP(8 hours)
The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.
§1
In this unit, copying with 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as 12X Speed DVD-R disc takes.
§2
In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, take.
§3
In this unit, copying with 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as 4X Speed DVD-RW disc takes.
§4
In this unit, copying with 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as 8X Speed +R disc takes.
Note
When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted. You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new
blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to
be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total. When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 22)
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
Required
time
12 min. 5x
6 min. 10x 3 min. 20x 2 min. 30x
1 min. 30 s.
Speed
40x
12X Speed
DVD-R
Required
time
5 min. 46 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 21 s.
58 s. 62x 48 s. 75x
1
Speed
10x 24x 44x
4X Speed
DVD-R DL
Required
time
15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 53 s.
2
Speed
4x
8x 16x 24x 32x
4X Speed
DVD-RW
Required
time
15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 57 s.
Make a copy list and then copy. You can set the unit to copy titles or Playlists (Video) in the way you want.
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] [DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.
[DVD-V] [+RW]
You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.
§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
§7
§8
§5
§6
).
3
Speed
4x 8x
16x
8X Speed
+R
Required
time
8 min. 20 s. 3 min. 45 s. 1 min. 53 s.
4
Speed
16x 32x
7x
4X Speed
+R DL
Required
time
15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.
2
Speed
4x 8x
16x
4X Speed
+RW
Required
time
15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.
24x 31x
Regarding copying of copyright-protected titles
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 85) compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD. Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-
RAM to the HDD.
Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 43).You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from copyright-
protected titles.
Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video)
cannot be registered on the same copying list.
Speed
4x 8x
16x
Editing
Copying
VQT3C69
51
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
Before copying
When copying a title with main and secondary audio (Analogue broadcast only)
Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68) when: – Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 68)
and you are copying in XP mode.
Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed [HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following
table.
Rec for High Speed Copy (> 67) Copy speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.
§
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
High speed
Normal speed
Speed Copy” set to “Off”. When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
§
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” (> 67) do not match.
When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW][-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Note
If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry screen
appears when copying. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK]. Parental control information of the title is not copied to discs.
Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding
system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)
already recorded on it.
[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
Preparation
Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 12, 15).Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL are automatically finalised (> 85). After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (You cannot copy to finalised discs.) When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to
DVD)” and press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rec time 0:52(SP)
OK
RETURN
Total : 0
OPTION
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
---
Disc Space: 4310MB All Titles
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
Channel
Date Day
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30 ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15 AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00 ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
Select Info
Title NameTime No.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
5 Press [OK]. 6 After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play­only and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and press [OK].
Copy starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying (> 53)COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions (> 54)
To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rec time 0:52(SP)
OK
RETURN
2Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.
Sort (All Titles screen only): Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.) If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is cancelled.
Note
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 67).
If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them. To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list (> 53).
Total : 0
001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008
---
Properties
Sort
Grouped Titles
OPTION
All Titles
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)
Channel
Date Day
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30 ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15 AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00 ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
Title NameTime No.
VQT3C69
52
Copying using the copying list–
HDD
Create List All Titles
007
ARD 10.10. FRI
008 0:30(XP)
ARD 11.10. SAT
- - -
- - - - - - - - -
Playlists
VIDEO
Advanced Copy
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW] > [HDD]
You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to disc.
See also “Before copying” (> 52).
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Copy Direction
1
HDD DVD
Copy Mode
2
VIDEO High Speed
Create List
3
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (> step 7).
0
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
Select the copy direction.
4 Set the copy direction.
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Register titles and Playlists (Video) for
copy.
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Copy
Cancel All
Copy Direction
1
HDD DVD
Copy Mode
2
VIDEO High Speed
Create List
3
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
OPTION
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size: 0MB
Name of item
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
( 0%)
When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or
” can be registered. [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “ ” can be
registered.
To show other pages (> below)
5 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list (> 54)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 54) exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).
6 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 67).
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. (You cannot stop while finalising)
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with copyright protection, only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD. [-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising) Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
Note
Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
Copying
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video)
and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
Press [;] again to cancel.The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
the check mark is cancelled.
VQT3C69
53
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
Create copy list.
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (However, titles and Playlists (Video) cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL] is displayed, but copy cannot be performed.
Title with copyright protection (> 22, Copyright­protected TV programmes)
Titles deleted from the HDD by copyright protection after copying. (> 22, Copyright-protected TV programmes)
Titles or Playlist (Video) contains still picture(s) Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Titles or Playlists (Video) that are restricted from viewing or copying by Child Lock function ([HDD] only) (> 66)
Title or Playlist (Video) recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
Size:
Name of item
When copying at normal speed, the total
Data size recorded to the copy destination
(0%)
Size: 0MB
data size will change according to the recording mode.
Page 01/01
The total data size shown may be larger
than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item, because of data management information being written to the copy destination, etc.
To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–5 (> 53) 1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlist (Video) and
press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list. Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 53)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Delete All
Add Delete Move
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit. While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD according to the set time. If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 67) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected in “Aspect for Recording” (> 67) of the Setup menu.
Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
Insert the finalised disc (> 15).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD­Video”) (> 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
1 Set “Copy Time”.
If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK]. 4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD.
Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
Copy Direction
1
DVD HDD
Copy Mode
2
DVD-Video XP
Copy Time
3
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
hour
2
00
min.
Set the time a few minutes longer.
Press OK to change the setting.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the content being played finishes.
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed. Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising the disc (> 63).
VQT3C69
54
4 When the top menu is displayed
My favorite 01/02
01
Chapter 1
03
05
02
04
06
Chapter 2
Chapter 3 Chapter 4
VIDEO
§
§
DVD Video Recording format
USB Cable
Video (MPEG2)
USB device
Play Video ( DivX ) Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start copying, and press [OK].
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached.)
Copying Video (MPEG2) from a video equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press [∫]. You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop copying. If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Note
The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 53, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
HDD
DVD-RAM
Preparation
1 Turn on both this unit and the camera. 2 Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable. 3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display automatically appears when you connect the camera to this unit. (> 35) 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Video ( DivX & MPEG2 )” and press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press
[OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 53.
SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy
list.
If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”
is not displayed.
Copying
VQT3C69
55
Copying still pictures/Playlist (Picture)
Copy New Pictures
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Copy
DVD
HDD
1
2
3
Source
Destination
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
DVD HDD
PICTURE
High Speed
0
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
1
2
3
Cancel All
Picture
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Picture/Folder
Start Copying
DVD HDD
PICTURE
High Speed
Name of item
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
New item (Total=0)
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
1
Cancel All
Picture
Copy Direction
Picture/Folder
DVD HDD
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/CD-RW.
When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in the
destination drive.
Copying new still pictures on the USB memory—Copy New Pictures
[USB] > [HDD] This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same USB memory, then only new still pictures will be imported.
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory. (> 15)
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)
2 Press [3, 4] to select
“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
4 Set the copy direction.
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the copy mode.
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Register still pictures for copy.
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
You can register still pictures, still picture folders or Playlists (Picture). Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot
be registered on the same list.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and
USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older information will be deleted.
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD.
Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.
Copying using the copying list
[HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM] [RAM] >[HDD] [RAM]
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE” Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
When you switch between the “PICTURE” and “Playlists”
tab, the check mark is cancelled.
To show other pages (> 57)To select another folder or Playlist (Picture) (> 57)
5 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list (> 57)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
To register on a folder by folder basis
(To register Playlists (Picture))
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
VQT3C69
56
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (@ step 7).
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
6 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlist (Picture) and
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
Press [;] again to cancel.The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
To show other pages (> 57)
7 Press [OK]. 8 Repeat steps 4–7 until you select all necessary folders
(Playlists (Picture)).
To edit the copying list (> 57)
9 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Folder
New folder
001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD
---
-
New folder
Copy All Pictures
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Copying” and press [OK].
Only when copying individual still pictures.
When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select “Folder”.
--
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
9 For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.[-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)
already recorded on it.
[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–5 (for a still picture) or 6–7 (for a folder or Playlist) (> 56)
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press
[;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Copying using the copying list)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title, Playlist (Picture) or still picture has been recorded or
deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)
After performing step 6–2 (> 56, To register individual still pictures) 1 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
Delete All
Add Delete
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture) and press
[OK].
Create List Picture ( JPEG )
HDD
Folder 103__DVD
0002
0001
----
----
OK
RETURN
Previous
0003
----
---- ---- ----
Page
001/001
OPTION
PICTURE PICTURE
0004
--------
Next
Create List
Playlists Playlists
HDD
OK
RETURN
\JPEG\DCIM\101__DVD 001 100 DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD 004 103__DVD
---
---
---
---
OPTION
Folder
Page 01/01
Picture 0012 File 0012
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
Individual still pictures of different folders (Playlists (Picture))
cannot be registered on the same list.
It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (> 48) if you want to
register still pictures of different folders on HDD in the same list.
Copying still pictures on the USB memory
Copying all the still pictures
[USB] > [HDD]
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)
2 Press [3, 4] to select
“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)
2 Press [3, 4] to select
“Picture ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
4 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying
using the copying list” (> 56).
Another folder cannot be selected as the copying destination
on step 7.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Note
Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
Copying
VQT3C69
57
Copying music to HDD
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
Music CD (CD-DA)MP3
You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.
Copying music from a CD
[CD] > [HDD] All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD. (Cannot record track-by-track.)
One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.Audio quality: LPCMThe maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
SELECT
RETURN
OK
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”
and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or
USB memory.
CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) > [HDD] You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/ DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.
One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.The maximum number of albums
§
on HDD: 300 The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000 (Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums can be recorded will be reduced.
§
Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be
§
that
treated as albums.
1 While stopped
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
Insert the CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/ DVD-R DL (> 15).
[USB]
Insert the USB memory (> 15).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 35)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music
( MP3 )” and press [OK].
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to “USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.
3 Register MP3 files for copy.
You can register MP3 files or folders. MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
Copy
Cancel All
Copy Direction
1
USB HDD
Copy Mode
2
MUSIC
High Speed
Create List
3
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
To register individual MP3 files
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
Press [;] again to cancel.The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
5 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list (> 59)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
OPTION
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Track/Folder
No. Size
New item (Total = 0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Track
Name of item
VQT3C69
58
To register on a folder by folder basis
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
No. Size
1
Cancel All
Trac k
Copy Direction
Track/Folder
USB HDD
Name of item
New item (Total=0)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
Press [;] again to cancel.The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
6 Press [OK].
To edit the copying list (> below)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
For individual files only
When specifying an existing folder as the copying destination
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
When creating a new folder as the copying destination
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. 2 Enter the folder name (> 50, Entering text).
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list
may not be the same at the copy destination.
If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3 files.
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 14), copying will stop partway through.
To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file) (> 58, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–6 (for a folder) (@ above).
1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 58, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Delete All
Add Delete
Copying
VQT3C69
59
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Setting menus
Menu Item Setting
Using on-screen menus
Common procedures
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play Picture Sound Other
Soundtrack
Subtitles
Audio channel
1
Digital 2/0 ch
Off
L R
Audio attribute
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz): b (bit): ch (channel):
Language
ENG: FRA: DEU: ITA: ESP: NLD: SVE: NOR:
English French German Italian Spanish Dutch Swedish Norwegian
DAN: POR: RUS: JPN: CHI: KOR: MAL: VIE:
Danish Portuguese Russian Japanese Chinese Korean Malay Vietnamese
Signal type
Sampling frequency Number of bits Number of channels
THA:
Thai
POL:
Polish
CES:
Czech
SLK:
Slovak
HUN:
Hungarian
FIN:
Finnish
¢:
Others
VQT3C69
60
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you cannot select or change.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Soundtrack
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute, Language). [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Select the soundtrack number. Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
Subtitles
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right, Language). [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information) Turn the subtitle on/off. Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit. [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number. “Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
Angle
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(> 32, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
Automatic:
Interlace:
Progressive:
PBC (Playback control > 85) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using the menus (> 18) on the disc.
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
§
§
§
[DVD-V]
The constructing method of the DivX contents is automatically distinguished and output.
Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.
Select when the disc contents were recorded using progressive.
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed. Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that can be selected will differ.
Repeat Play
All [CD] [VCD]Chapter [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Group MP3 (except [USB])
PL (Playlist (Video))
Title [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Tra ck [CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])
Select “Off” to cancel.
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.
On:
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Off:
Video is played back as it is.
Input NR
Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue channels).
Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.
On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.
Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and sound effect
DVB Multi Audio
[Digital channel only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the desired channel before recording. DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be
selected will differ.
§
GermanSpanishCzech
EnglishItalianPolishOriginal
§
“Original” is displayed when the original language is available in a broadcast.
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear.
FrenchRussianTurkish
Other menu—Change the DVB subtitle and display
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
Channel information
Recording or play status/input channel
Selected audio type
Available recording time and recording mode
Title number and elapsed time during play/ Recording mode
Date and time
No display
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
Title number and elapsed time during recording/ Recording mode
The remaining time appears here while stopped.
Current time
When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed on the television was broadcasted
position
DVB Subtitles
[Digital channel only]
You can set the desired subtitles if more than one subtitle track can be selected. DVB Subtitles cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
EnglishItalianPolishOriginal
§
§
“Original” is displayed when the original language is
GermanSpa nishCzech
available in a broadcast.
Position
1–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.
FrenchRussianTurki sh
Status messages
Press [STATUS ].
The display changes each time you press the button.
HDD
REC
PLAY
1 DVB
ABC
L R
Copying 10%

18:53:50 11.10.
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP
Remain
13:50 XP
HDD and disc management
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Common procedures
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
View
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
30:00 SP
Remain
Playlists
Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup
Play 15:05:13
Live 15:10:46
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management” or “DVD Management” and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD Management
DVD-RA M
SELECT
OK
When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
RETURN
Titles 11 Used
0 : 22
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Remain
5:38 (EP)
Off
Setting menus
VQT3C69
61
HDD and disc management
My favorite 01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
(
Setting the protection
[RAM]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
SELECT
OK
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write­protected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RETURN
Titles 11 Used
0 : 22
Disc Name
Disc Protection
Delete all titles
Format Disc
Remain
5:38 (EP)
On
Deleting all titles and Playlists (Video)—Delete all titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.[RAM] Release protection (> above).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
4 Press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Note
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
Deleting all video titles will result in all Playlists (Video) also being
deleted.
Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or
computer data cannot be deleted.
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.[RAM] Release protection (> left, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(> 50, Entering text)
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
DVD Management
DVD-RAM
Note
[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record
still images to that disc.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Documentary
Titles 11 Used
0 : 22
Remain
5:38
Deleting all the contents—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data), and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc
even if you have set protection.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”
or “Format Disc” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
Note
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
Note
When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be
possible to use it on any other equipment.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed. ≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if they
have been deleted.
VQT3C69
62
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Selecting the background style— Top
Display after finalising
Title Name
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD­Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 43,
Change Thumbnail)
[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first— Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu: The top menu appears first. Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying
[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above) before finalising the disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
Note
You cannot cancel finalising.Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
4 Press [OK].
Top Menu List
1
4
7 8
the top menu.
Note
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four times).
After finalising ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(> 62) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically
([-R] [-RW‹V›]: about 5-minute chapters/[+R]: about 8-minute chapters), if – the titles were directly recorded to the disc. – the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode.
§
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode of recording.
There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters
during play.
2
3
5
6
01
9
Recording/Editing/Entering name Play on other players
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be displayed.
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic-europe.com
§
Before
finalising
After
finalising
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left) before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 61, Common procedures)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating. Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
4 Press [OK].
Note
You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Setting menus
VQT3C69
63
Changing the unit’s settings
Tab s
Menus Options
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu. The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Common procedures
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Setup
Tuning Disc Picture Sound
Display Connection Others
Remote Control Clock Standby Settings DivX Registration TV Guide Type System Update Initialize
SELECT
OK
DVD 1
Digital
TAB
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Tuning
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Favourites Edit
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the channel setting itself. Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite
during timer recording standby.
Press the “Green” button to select the Favourite. [DVB-C] (and analogue
broadcasts)
Favourites Editor
1 Das Erste 2 ZDF 3 RTL Television 4 ABC 5 VOX 6 ProSieben 7 RTL2 8 kabel eins 9 Super RTL
Favourite Select
123...
Favourite 1
Page +
All Channels
Sorting Mode CategoryAdd
SELECT
RETURN
The channels can be sorted in numerical or alphabetical order with
“Red” button.
[DVB-C] To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press the “Blue” button to select the Category.
Every time you press the button, you change between:
All Channels (Except for Analogue Channels) J TV J Radio J Analogue (Only when receiving analogue broadcast signal) J All Channels
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the left column and press
the “Yellow” button. Repeat this step to add other channels.
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
[DVB-T] (and analogue broadcasts)
All Channels
1 ABC
2 ABC HDTV 3 RTL 4 Das Erste
Sorting Mode
Page -
SELECT
RETURN
Favourites Editor
123...
Favourite Select
Favourite 1
[DVB-T] To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column
and press the “Yellow” button.
Repeat this step to add other channels.Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels have been added to the Favourite.)
2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [1]
§
.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [1]
§
.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and
press the “Yellow” button.
Repeat this step to delete other channels.Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel itself. [DVB-C] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” or other categories (e.g. TV, Radio, etc.) after deleting channels from a Favourite. [DVB-T] You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” after deleting channels from a Favourite.
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column
1 Press [1]
§
.
2 Press the “Red” button.
(> 50, Entering text)
§
When the station name of the left column is highlighted
Auto Setup Restart
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 8) fails for some reason.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup. When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the Language setting screen appears.
All the settings except for clock settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
Add AllAdd
VQT3C69
64
Settings for DVB-C Channels/
Add New DVB Channels
Progress 0%
100%
No. QualityChannel Name Type
Add New DVB Channels
Scan CH 5 69
CH QualityChannel Name Type
A new DVB Channel has been found. Start DVB Auto Setup ? Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete all Timer Programmes.
New Channel
NoYes
DVB Advanced Setup
010
Network ID
0
Signal Quality
010
Signal Strength
Home Frequency
MHz
338,00
Settings for DVB-T Channels
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
[DVB-C] DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not complete successfully.
DVB Manual Tuning
Frequency
Symbol Rate Bandwidth Signal Quality Signal Strength
No.
Free TV : 0 Pay TV : 0 Radio : 0
SCAN
START Frequency RETURN
SELECT
1 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and signal strength.]
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Symbol Rate” and enter Symbol Rate for
tuning with the numbered buttons if needed. Normally set to “Auto”. (Default : “Auto”)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Bandwidth” and press [2, 1] to select
“7 MHz” or “8 MHz”.
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
5 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
[DVB-T] DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not complete successfully.
Channel System
Frequency
Signal Quality Signal Strength
No.
TV : 0 Radio : 0 Data : 0
START SCAN OFFSET RETURN
CH
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set. 2 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal quality and signal strength.]
3 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
4 Press [EXIT] and press [WXCH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added digital channels to receive.
[DVB-C] [DVB-T]
338,00 Auto 8
010 010
DVB Manual Tuning
Western Europe (CCIR)
[CH24] 010 010
MHz
MHz
NewChannel Name Type
0 9
Number
498,0
MHz
NewChannel Name Type
Change Channel System
If there is no signal quality and/ or signal strength, press the “Red” button and select the correct channel system.
[Automatic] When a new DVB channel is added, New Channel
Message appears automatically. If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
[Off] New Channel Message does not appear.
Signal Condition
You can check the Signal Condition.
[DVB-C] [DVB-T]
DVB Signal Condition
DVB Signal Condition
DVB Channel
Signal Quality 010 Signal Strength 010 Network Name Parameter
RETURN
1 Das Erste
Kabel Deutschland 113 MHz, 6900kS/s
Channel Channel
DVB Signal Condition
DVB Channel
DVB Channel
Signal Quality 010
Signal Quality 010 Signal Strength 010
Signal Strength 010
RETURN
RETURN
+ –
[CH14] 5 BR3
[CH14] 5 BR3
Channel
Channel Channel
Channel
+
+
Press [WXCH] to select the channel. When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen. 2 Press [WXCH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3 Display the Setup menu again (> 64).
Signal Quality
The quality of the signal is shown. Below 2 (display red): The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the pictures and sound. 2–5 (display orange): The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case. Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
The strength of the signal is shown. The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%, “10” means signal strength 100%. If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red. Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. When the signal is weak:
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (> left).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
[DVB-C] Network Name
The network name which is stored in the transport stream list for the current DVB service is displayed. If there is no network name in it, “Unknown” is displayed.
[DVB-C] Parameter
The frequency and the symbol rate are displayed.
[DVB-C] DVB Advanced Setup
You can set up channels by entering “Home Frequency” and “Network ID” obtained from your cable provider. Digital timer recording programmes are cancelled and digital
tuning data are replaced by new ones.
[DVB-C] Press [3, 4] to select “Quick Scan” or “Full Scan” and press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available digital channels. This takes about 20 minutes.
A message is displayed when the search is finished. “No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new channels can be found.
Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
New Channel Message
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Home Frequency” and press [2, 1] to
select the predefined value. You can also enter the frequency with numbered buttons.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Network ID” and enter Network ID with
numbered buttons.
4 Press [OPTION] to add “Symbol Rate”, if needed.
If you do not need to add “Symbol Rate”, go to step 6.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter the
symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].
6 Press [OK].
Advanced Setup starts.
Setting menus
VQT3C69
65
Changing the unit’s settings
Pos Channel CH Fine Tuning Video System
901
4
Auto
Manual Tuning
ARD
Auto
Mono
Off
Title Page
301
RETURN
SELECT
DVB Preferred Language
You can select up to 2 different subtitles and audio tracks to be used when audio and subtitles of digital broadcasts are received. Select the order of priority. If the selected language is not available, then the language included in the broadcast programme is selected.
Multi Audio Multi Audio ( alternative )
[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak] [Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]
[Original]
§
Subtitles Subtitles ( alternative )
[English] [German] [Italian] [French] [Spanish] [Turkish] [Czech] [Slovak] [Hungarian] [Polish] [Russian]
§
The language specified as “Original” by the broadcast channel
[Original]
§
[DVB-C] Hard of Hearing
[On] If this service is available for the broadcasts, subtitles for
[Off]
the hard of hearing are first priority.
Child Lock
You can restrict viewing and recording of the programmes unsuitable for children. 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Child Lock” and press [OK].
Child Lock
Enter a 4-digit PIN,
then press OK.
Settings for Analogue Channels
Press [OK] to show the following setting.
Manual Tuning
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel details.
Manual Tuning
Pos Channel CH Pos Channel CH
1 ARD 4 2 ZDF 3 N3 4 HR3 5 BR3 10 6
SELECT
7 8
OK
RETURN
9
10
Delete
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the “Red” button.
Note
This unit does not support SECAM L, L’.
To change the tuning settings for individual programme position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
[OK].
2
5
8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
VQT3C69
PIN
Number
0 - - 9
RETURN

2 Press the numbered buttons to enter a 4-digit PIN and press
[OK]. A confirmation message is displayed when a four-digit PIN is
entered for the first time. Press [OK].
Make a note of the 4-digit PIN in case you forget it.To change the defined 4-digit PIN (> below)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Parental Rating” and press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the age and press [OK].
To unlock
After performing steps 1–3 Press [3, 4] to select “No Limit” and press [OK].
Note
If you make timer recordings of programmes on which “Child Lock”
works, PIN code entry is required when playing back the recordings.
Parental control information of the recorded programmes is not
copied to discs.
To change the defined 4-digit PIN
You can change the defined four-digit PIN. After performing steps 1–2
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Change PIN” and press [OK]. 4 Press the numbered buttons to enter a new 4-digit PIN and press
[OK]. A confirmation message is displayed. Press [OK].
66
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Pos
Programme position in the table
(You cannot change the programme position.)
Channel
To enter or change the Channel of a TV station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and press [OK]. If the station name needs a blank space, select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
CH
To enter newly available TV stations or change the CH number of an already tuned TV station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter the CH number of the desired TV station. Wait a few moments until the desired TV station has been tuned. After the desired TV station is tuned, press [OK].
Fine Tuning
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition and press [OK].Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
Video System
To select the video system type
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the picture lacks colour, and press [OK]. Auto
This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and SECAM signals.
PA L
For receiving PAL signals.
SECAM
For receiving SECAM signals.
Mono
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound is distorted due to inferior reception conditions, or if you want to record the normal (mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual broadcast, and press [OK].
Title Page
To enter the Teletext title page for a channel
Entering title page number allows the unit to automatically record programme and station names. Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to enter the number and press [OK]. To find the correct title page for the station, refer to its Teletext
TV guide.
You can make the following two settings by selecting the external input channel (AV1, AV2) in step 1. Video System (Auto/PAL/SECAM)
In order to record properly, make the appropriate settings to match the connected equipment.
Title Page (Auto/Off)
Disc
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Settings for Playback
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.
Do not forget your PIN.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected) [8 No Limit [1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video. Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected) [Unlock Recorder] [Change PIN] [Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]
Soundtrack
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Original] The original language of each disc will be
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Subtitles
[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Other ¢¢¢¢]
Menus
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Russian] [Polish] [Czech] [Other ¢¢¢¢]
§
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (> 76) with the numbered buttons. When the selected language is not available on the disc, the default language is played. There are discs where you can only switch the language from the menu screen (> 18).
[DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you make here.
Settings for Recording
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode (> 23, Recording modes and approximate recording/copying times).
[EP ( 6 hours )] [EP ( 8 hours )] The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6 hours )” than
when using “EP ( 8 hours )”.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying. [Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
[16:9] [4:3
When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded in the original aspect ratio.
In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW. High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”
] All DVD-Video can be played.
ratings recorded on them.
selected.
§
available, subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on that disc.
§
§
You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc. You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.
aspect used when recording started (including when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
]
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 42)
[Automatic
[Off] No chapter start points are set.
] [5 minutes]
Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, aspect, etc. is restricted ( We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This setting is effective when recording from a television programme or external equipment, or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[On
[Off]
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles. – Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set
in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).
– Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 68).
– You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).
>
below).
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).
[Maximum] [Normal ( Silent )] The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected, however the time required for copying will double (approximately).
Start Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV Guide time. [1 min earlier] [3 min earlier] [5 min earlier] [10 min earlier] [Off
]
Finish Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV Guide time. [1 min later] [3 min later] [5 min later] [10 min later] [Off
]
Picture
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording. The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (>69).
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting. [Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (>85, Frames and fields). [Automatic] [Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
[Frame] Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between Playlist chapter segments and partially deleted titles.
]
The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This
[On
does not work when there are several audio types included on the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (PLAY Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.
[Off] The points where chapters in
played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is clearer and finer.)
a
1.3).
Playlists (Video)
change are
Setting menus
VQT3C69
67
Changing the unit’s settings
Sound
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only) Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
[On] [Off
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Analogue broadcast only) Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when: Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for
XP Recording”).
][M2]
[M 1 You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette recorder. Select the audio on the other equipment.
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s Digital Audio Output terminal (> 73). Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz. Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
[Off
connected equipment can process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
Dolby Digital
Select how to output the signal. Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal. Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels. Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream
[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in
§
DTS
Select how to output the signal. Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal. Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels. Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream
[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in
§
MPEG
Select how to output the signal. Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal. Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels. Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in
[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in
§
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
§
] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
Dolby Digital decoder.
] When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
decoder.
DTS decoder.
MPEG decoder.
MPEG decoder.
]
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode. [Dolby Digital The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).
] (> 85) [LPCM] (> 85)
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen messages. [English] [Deutsch [Español] [Polski] [Русский]
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information screen (> 17) disappears automatically. The length of time the control panel (> 40) is displayed can also be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.) [3 sec.] [5 sec.]
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey background when tuner reception is weak.
] [Off]
[On
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display. This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save in Standby” to “On” or “On Timer” (> 70).
[Bright
] [Dim]
[Automatic] The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. When “Power Save in Standby” is activated (> 70), power consumption while in standby mode is reduced.
Pause Live TV Icon
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen icon while using the Pause Live TV function.
] [Off]
[On
Screen Saver
[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
[Off]
Teletext Character Set
Select Teletext language.
] English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Spanish,
[West
[East 1] Czech, English, Estonian, Lettish, Rumanian,
[East 2] Czech, Hungarian, Lettish, Polish, Rumanian,
Swedish, Turkish, etc.
Russian, Ukrainian, etc.
Slovak, etc.
FUNCTION MENU Display
[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
displayed. (> 5)
[Off]
] [Français] [Italiano]
[7 sec.] [10 sec.]
VQT3C69
68
Connection
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.) Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to change the settings.
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected. [16:9
] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Pan & Scan]
[Letterbox]
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD.
[PAL
] Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
[NTSC] Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Note
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby,
this unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them.
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television. 16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style.
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.
Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
HDMI Settings
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed. However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting. To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible. [576i / 480i] [576p / 480p] [720p] [1080i] [1080p] When setting video output to “1080p”, we
[Automatic
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p / 480p or 576i / 480i).
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
[4:3
]
Picture output expands left or right.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with side panels.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical] [Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable and connected to a TV with an HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the highest quality of audio from discs (
>
73).
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
[On
]
[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV. If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select “RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.
]
[Video
Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is connected.
[S Video]
Select when a TV that can receive an S Video signal is connected.
[RGB 1]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
[RGB 2]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
Setting menus
VQT3C69
69
Changing the unit’s settings
Setup
Tuning
Remote Control
Press “” and “OK” together for more than 5 seconds on the remote control.
Disc
e.g., This screen appears while receiving a digital broadcast.
AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment. Press [OK] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
Set to “S Video” when receiving or recording S Video output from external equipment.
] [S Video]
[Video
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to “NTSC” (> 69).
[Ext Link 1] When a digital satellite receiver which transmits a
special control signal recordings via the 21-pin Scart cable is connected. Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal.
[Ext Link 2
] When external equipment with a timer function is
connected. When it turns on, recording starts. When it turns off, recording stops.
Active Antenna
§
[On] Select this when you will use indoor antenna that is not
equipped with power supply.
]
[Off
Common Interface
Access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) modules. (> 6, 10) Follow the on-screen instructions.
§
Can be selected when selecting Digital Terrestrial (DVB-T) Channels in Auto Setup
Others
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products close together.
] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]
[DVD 1 Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
1
Press [3,4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”) and press [OK].
To change the code on the remote control 2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s (> step 2).
Clock
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a
day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed
in the method below.
Press [
3, 4]
1
to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press [OK].
Clock
Automatic
Time Date
0 : 00 : 00
Number
0 9
Please set clock manually.
CHANGE
SELECT
OK: store RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
1
. 1
Off
.
2010
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows: Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year ^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
Note
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when
“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic
time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is
adjusted several times every day.
Standby Settings
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Power Save in Standby
[On] It will go into “Power Save in Standby” mode
[Off] It is possible to start quickly from the standby
[On Timer] “Power Save in Standby” is set to activate
1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].
Power Save in Standby
Number
0 9
CHANGE
SELECT
OK
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour). 3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press [3, 4] to
set the stop time (hour).
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.You can set start and stop time by the hour.If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is
activated at all hours.
when the unit is in standby mode.
mode. (Quick Start mode)
during the setting time period. (> below)
Power Save On Timer
From
0
Saves standby power consumption by disabling Quick Start function and AV2 loop-through in standby. Unit's Display is set to "Automatic". Press OK to manually set the period of Power Save.
To
6
:00
:00
Note
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1 (> step 2).
VQT3C69
70
Auto Standby
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off. After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off once the set time has passed.
[30 minutes] [1 hour] [2 hours] [4 hours
[6 hours]
[Off] The unit will not automatically turn off.
]
Auto Standby after OTR
[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording (> 19).
[Off]
Auto Standby after Copy
[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing copy (> 51-59).
]
[Off
RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )
[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit.
TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the RF cable (> 73).
[Off] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation
message is displayed. Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce standby power consumption. Power consumption is lowered additionally when
“Power Save in Standby” is activated.
If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV
with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast images do not appear on TV.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video­on-Demand (VOD) content (> 36).
TV Guide Type
This unit can receive either of the TV Guides for the digital or analogue broadcasts. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
It will go into Standby status once, and the power will be turned
on again automatically. This procedure may take a few minutes.
All of the TV Guide data for digital broadcasts and timer
recording settings will be erased.
[Digital Channels
] [Analogue Channels]
System Update
In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates. Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Only the TV Guide for digital broadcast can be downloaded with
this setting. Refer to page 9 for analogue broadcasts.
Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update
is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.
TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While
the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.
TV Guide/Software search period Software Search Period
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” or “Software Update in Standby” is set to “On”. If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority. In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is not available: [Automatic [02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00] [14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available: [Automatic
§
§
]
§
[Daytime] (06:00-22:00)
]
The unit will give priority to searching for TV Guide download and update data at midnight.
§2
§1
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually. A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A message shows that the update has finished. If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ Data Download Now
Start downloading GUIDE Plus+ data. If this is performed in standby mode for timer recording, timer
recording may not work correctly.
[DVB-T] GUIDE Plus+ System Information
You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.
[DVB-T] Post Code
You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.
§1
When “Digital Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”
§2
When “Analogue Channels” is selected in “TV Guide Type”
Initialize
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
All the settings except for the language settings, Slideshow Settings, clock settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset.
[Yes] [No
Default Settings
All the settings except for the tuning settings, clock settings, language settings, disc language settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets.
[Yes] [No
§1
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
§2
Recording on the HDD will not be deleted.
§1, §2
]
§1, §2
]
Setting menus
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is
downloaded automatically.
[Off] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is available, the setting
is fixed to “On” automatically.
Software Update in Standby
[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
[Off]
VQT3C69
71
Other Settings
Turn TV on/off
Input select
Volu me
Channel Select
Television operation
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the television channel and change the television volume.
1 Point the remote control at the
2 Test by turning on the television and
Note
If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28 AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47 AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24 BEJING 33 NEC 36 BEKO 05/71/72/73/74 NOBLEX 33 BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61 BP 09 NORDMENDE BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45 BUSH CENTREX 66 ORION 05 CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69 CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64 DAEWOO 64/65 DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05 DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38 ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52 FERGUSON 10/34 FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05 FISHER 21 SABA 10 FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26 FUNAI 32/42/43/65/6863/67 GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05 GOODMANS GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30 GRUNDIG HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25 HITACHI INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09 IRRADIO ITT 25 SONY 08 JINGXING JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14 KDS KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52 KONKA LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57
VQT3C69
MAG 52 YAMAHA 18/41
72
TV
Í
Í
Í
VOL
VOL
CH
DRIVE
SELECT
1
AV
AV
2 54
CH
PAGE
3
CH
6
television While pressing [Í TV], enter the code with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 01: [0] > [1] 10: [1] > [0]
changing channels.
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this remote control is not compatible with your television.
Brand Code Brand Code
10
05
05
09 SEG
05/22/23/40/41
30 SINUDYNE 05
52 TEVION
62 THOMSON
07/46
ONWA 30/39/70
PHILIPS
PYE
SAMSUNG
SANYO 21/54/55/56
SHARP 18
TCL
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
05/06/46
05
05/69/75/76/77/78
31/33/66/67/6949
52
10/15/44
05LOEWE
HOLD function
The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the HOLD function is on, “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
To cancel the HOLD function
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X HOLD” disappears.
CI Plus compatible CAM (Conditional Access Module) software upgrade
Software of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be upgraded automatically from broadcasts. Availability of software upgrade is detected while viewing the programmes compatible with CI Plus.
When notification is displayed on the screen, select “Yes” and press [OK].
Notice is not displayed in the following cases:
– When recording a programme – When timer recording and CAM software upgrade occur
simultaneously
– When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.
“CAM-UP” is displayed on the unit’s display during upgrading.
It is also displayed on the Digital Channel Information (> 17) when the CAM software can be upgraded immediately.
1 Das Erste
ZDF-Mor
19:00 - 19:30
To execute CAM software upgrade, push the “Red” button while the digital channel information is displayed, and follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed
while upgrading the CAM. Any buttons on the remote control or the unit cannot be used while upgrading the CAM.
If the timer recording is started, CAM software upgrade is
cancelled to start recording.
For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
NOW
TXT
All Channels
18:53
Change Category
CAM Upgrade Info
Additional connections
Reference
RF IN
RF OUT
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
R
OUT
AUDIO IN
R L
VIDEO
IN
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
Television’s rear panel
RF IN
RF OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
R
OUT
AUDIO IN
R L
Audio cable
This unit’s rear panel
Amplifier’s rear panel
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
BITSTREAM
)
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when connecting.
This unit’s rear panel
Insert fully, with this side facing up.
Amplifier’s rear panel
OUT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(
BITSTREAM
)
COMMON INTERFACE
To the terrestrial aerial
RF coaxial cable
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
AC mains lead
(supplied) Connect only after all other connections are complete.
21-pin Scart cable
RF coaxial cable
(supplied)
Cooling fan
Connecting a terminal other than the 21-pin Scart terminal (> 7, above)
Television’s rear panel
VCR’s rear panel
Digital satellite receiver’s rear panel
21-pin Scart cable
Fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
Common Interface (CI) slot
Cable
Aerial cable/ CATV Coaxial cable
Connecting a television with AUDIO/ VIDEO
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting a stereo amplifier
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
Required setting
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 68)
When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 69). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not supplied),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
OPTICAL IN
ON INTERFACE
ON INTERFACE
AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM
Connecting a television and VCR, digital satellite receiver
1
2
VHF/UHF
RF IN
5
RF IN
RF OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
VIDEO
AUDIO
OUT
RF OUT
L
R
AV
6
COMMON INTERFACE
COMMON INTERFACE
AV1 (TV)
AV2 (
)
EXT
AV OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
PCPCM/M/BITSTREAM
3
AV
AV
OPTICAL
4
AV
7
AC IN
Setting menus
Reference
§
Only when connecting digital satellite receiver with this unit
Required setting
“AV2 Input” setting in the Setup menu (> 70)
Connect the unit directly to the television (> 6)
VQT3C69
73
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Recording
Set up
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital terrestrial broadcasts?
¾ You can use your current aerial. Room rod aerials are also
suitable. Use an indoor antenna if the reception is poor. Consult your local TV aerial installer.
Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts?
¾ Ye s.
However, HD broadcasts are down-converted to SD video when receiving or recording them.
What equipment is necessary to play multi channel surround sound?
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without
other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 7, 73)
Are the headphones and speakers directly connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
the amplifier etc. (> 73)
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in another country?
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not
include “2” or “ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region number be played?
¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a
standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit.
¾ This unit records/copies on the following discs (HDD):
– Records TV programme or other contents by pressing
[¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording: HDD only
– Records using EXT LINK: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format)/+R/+RW
– Copies titles: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format)/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL This unit plays the following discs: HDD/DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL/+R/+RW/+R DL/ DVD-Video/CD/Video CD/SVCD (> 12–13)
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording
compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
Can I record from a commercially purchased video cassette or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit be played on other equipment?
¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players
after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible
equipment.
Can a digital audio signal from this unit be recorded to other equipment?
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,
change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu. (> 68) – PCM Down Conversion: On – Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
¾ You cannot record MP3 signals.
[Analogue] Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during recording?
¾ Yes, you can. Just press [AUDIO] during recording on HDD.
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 32)
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to
“On” before recording the programme.) Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 51)
USB
What can or cannot be done using the USB port on this unit?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (> 35)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 56, 57)
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (> 58) ¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 55)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14)
VQT3C69
74
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility with this unit.
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded
in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG). (> 13, 14)
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Music
TV Channels
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
TV Guide
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start and end time that are different from the TV Guide system?
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 26)
¾ If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start
recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin of up to 10 minutes. (> 67, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording Time)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with
digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming. (> 25, 26)
How can I cancel a Timer programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DELETE ¢]. (> 26)
Please tell me about TV reception channels.
¾ Channel coverage depends on the tuner system you use.
Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.
List of TV Reception Channels
Tun er
System
PAL-B,G,H CCIR E2 – E12
DVB-T/C Germany 5 – 12 21 – 69 D051 - D073,
Channel
Coverage
VHF UHF CATV
A – H2
(Italy)
21 – 69 S01 – S05
(S1 – S3)
S1 – S20
(M1 – U10)
S21 – S41
D113 - D858,
S1–S20
(M1–U10)
7 MHz Band
51 – 858 MHz
What happens when I unplug the unit from the household mains socket?
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated. ¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
What happens if my postal code changes, e.g. if I move?
¾ TV Guide data may not be downloaded correctly. Change “Post
Code” in the Setup menu (for [DVB-T]), or change the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu (for [Analogue]). If necessary, perform a full Auto-Setup. Saved TV Guide data may be lost. (> 30, 64, 71)
[Analogue] Why is the GUIDE Plus+ system only available after approx. 2 hours?
¾ The data rate, at which GUIDE Plus+ is sent, is limited.
Depending on the country, signal quality and number of channels received, the time until the GUIDE Plus+ system is ready can vary.
[Analogue] How often is the GUIDE Plus+ data updated and when?
¾ The GUIDE Plus+ data is transmitted from the Host Channel
(the television station transmitting the television programme list) several times a day. Data will be transmitted at 2:50 AM every day. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. The GUIDE Plus+ data is downloaded automatically when the unit is turned off. (> 10)
Reference
VQT3C69
75
Messages
On the television
This unit is not authorised to play this protected DivX video.
Cannot finish recording completely. Copy-protect signal was detected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are recorded. Cannot finish recording completely.
Cannot record. Maximum number of titles exceeded.
Cannot playback. TV system is different from the setting. To playback, please change the TV System in Setup.
Cannot play on this unit. You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 14)
No Disc The disc may be upside down.
No folders. There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 14)
Not enough space in the copy destination. Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 21, 43, 47, 62)
This is a non-recordable disc. The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 15)
Unable to format.
This disc is not formatted properly. Format it using DVD Management in FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours ( in SP mode ) is necessary.
Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.
This DivX rental has expired.
$ The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 36)
The programme was copy-protected.
The HDD or disc may be full.The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 23)[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 21, 43, 62)
Use a new disc.
You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit. Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 69)
Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 54, 57, 59)
The unit cannot record/copy on the disc you inserted. Insert a compatible disc for this
unit. (> 12)
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 62)
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499. Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 21, 43, 62)
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 36)
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian: 6566 Afar: 6565 Afrikaans: 6570 Albanian: 8381 Amharic: 6577 Arabic: 6582 Armenian: 7289 Assamese: 6583 Aymara: 6589 Azerbaijani: 6590 Bashkir: 6665 Basque: 6985 Bengali; Bangla:
Bhutani: 6890 Bihari: 6672 Breton: 6682 Bulgarian: 6671 Burmese: 7789 Byelorussian: 6669 Cambodian: 7577
Catalan: 6765 Chinese: 9072 Corsican: 6779 Croatian: 7282 Czech: 6783 Danish: 6865 Dutch: 7876 English: 6978 Esperanto: 6979 Estonian: 6984 Faroese: 7079 Fiji: 7074 Finnish: 7073
6678
French: 7082 Frisian: 7089 Galician: 7176 Georgian: 7565 German: 6869 Greek: 6976 Greenlandic: 7576 Guarani: 7178
Gujarati: 7185 Hausa: 7265 Hebrew: 7387 Hindi: 7273 Hungarian: 7285 Icelandic: 7383 Indonesian: 7378 Interlingua: 7365 Irish: 7165 Italian: 7384 Japanese: 7465 Javanese: 7487 Kannada: 7578 Kashmiri: 7583 Kazakh: 7575 Kirghiz: 7589 Korean: 7579 Kurdish: 7585 Laotian: 7679 Latin: 7665 Latvian, Lettish: 7686
Lingala: 7678 Lithuanian: 7684 Macedonian: 7775 Malagasy: 7771 Malay: 7783 Malayalam: 7776 Maltese: 7784 Maori: 7773 Marathi: 7782 Moldavian: 7779 Mongolian: 7778 Nauru: 7865 Nepali: 7869 Norwegian: 7879 Oriya: 7982 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Persian: 7065 Polish: 8076 Portuguese: 8084 Punjabi: 8065 Quechua: 8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277 Romanian: 8279 Russian: 8285 Samoan: 8377 Sanskrit: 8365 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Serbian: 8382 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Shona: 8378 Sindhi: 8368 Singhalese: 8373 Slovak: 8375 Slovenian: 8376 Somali: 8379 Spanish: 6983 Sundanese: 8385 Swahili: 8387 Swedish: 8386 Tagalog: 8476 Tajik: 8471
Tamil: 8465 Tatar: 8484 Telugu: 8469 Thai: 8472 Tibetan: 6679 Tigrinya: 8473 Tonga: 8479 Turkish: 8482 Turkmen: 8475 Twi: 8487 Ukrainian: 8575 Urdu: 8582 Uzbek: 8590
Vietnamese: 8673 Volapük: 8679
Welsh: 6789 Wolof: 8779 Xhosa: 8872 Yiddish: 7473 Yoruba: 8979 Zulu: 9085
VQT3C69
76
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD
(“” stands for a number.)
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds. (> 70)
GUIDE TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 10, 71)
HARD ERR
§
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 15)
This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 11)
NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT
§
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the message disappears.
PROG FULL
§
There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 26)
REMOVE The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.
SP 35:50 LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.
Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available. “SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.
SW-DL The unit is performing a software update. (> 71)
CAM-UP CAM is being upgraded. (> 72)
UNFORMAT
§
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
that has been recorded on other equipment. Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 62)
UNSUPPORT
§
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 12–13)You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 14)
F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U50 A short circuit was detected in the aerial input. Please check your aerial.
U59 The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears. Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is displayed when the unit is in the
recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U76 HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
U80 U81
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.
Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U99
U88 (When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 78) If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
H or F There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.
(> 78–83)
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.) If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD ≥The HOLD function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 72)
§
The message are alternately displayed.
Reference
VQT3C69
77
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
Regular disc rotating sounds.Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.Image disturbance during search.
Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥ ≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is
activated.
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds.)
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound.
Power
No power. The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (> 6, 73)
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording
standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (> 25)
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the
main unit to turn the unit on.
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to 1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
to eject the disc. 1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CHW] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens or becomes impossible after connecting the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF OUT
terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in the Setup menu. (> 71)
VQT3C69
78
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link­compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 39)
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI
Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating instructions for the TV.
Displays
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 68)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 70)
The time recorded on the disc and the available time shown do not add up. The displayed time of this unit is different from the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times. ¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
The clock is not correct.
¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time
correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually. (> 70)
Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed time displayed is less. (Only when recording in NTSC)
The digital channel information or control panel does not appear. Status messages do not appear.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 68)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback
or recording.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 40)
¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel
information.
Some functions of DVB-C/DVB-T do not work.
¾ The unit does not necessarily support all DVB-C/DVB-T
functions such as MHP (Multimedia Home Platform) etc. New functions introduced by broadcasters cannot be guaranteed to work.
The grey background does not appear.
¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 68)
Screen size is wrong.
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 69) ¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 69)
The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.
¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for
Recording” to “4:3”. (> 67)
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode. – If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW. – If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in
the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 67)
¾
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording. (
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.
>
67)
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 68) Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 60)
There is no apparent change in picture quality when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on­screen menus.
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
The images from this unit do not appear on the television. Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the AV1 terminal,
VIDEO OUT terminal or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 6, 7, 73)
¾
Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 69)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that
matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored
on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal. (> 36)
The picture is distorted during play, or video will not play correctly.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations: – between titles recorded with different recording modes. – between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios. – between scenes recorded with different resolutions. – between playlist chapters.
Sound
No sound. Low volume. Distorted sound. Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected one. (> 7, 68, 69, 73)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 32) ¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX) ¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu. (> 69)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only
record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast. If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 67)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 68)
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (> 67)
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an
HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio cables. (> 7, 68, 73)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
Operation
Cannot operate the television. The remote control doesn’t work.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (> 72)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (> 70) Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
number button at the same time for more than 5 seconds.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 2) ¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 2)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission. ¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again
after changing the batteries. (> 70)
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (> 72)
¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 72)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Playback drive has not been selected properly. (> 18) ¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. ¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows: 1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby. Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording. ¾
Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [ Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer. If the HOLD function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the HOLD function. (> 72)
Í
] is pressed).
>
25)
Reference
VQT3C69
79
Troubleshooting guide
Cannot tune channels.
¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73)
Startup is slow.
¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu. (> 70) ¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted. – The clock is not set. – Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
Recording, timer recording and copying
Cannot record. Cannot copy.
¾ You cannot record TV programmes or other contents directly to
the disc by pressing [¥ REC], Timer Recording or Flexible Recording. Record them on HDD and then copy them to discs.
(> 22)
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 12)
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 62)
¾ The disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 62) ¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 85)
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc. (> 21, 43, 62)
¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images
recorded on it.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.
Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 21, 43, 62) – If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 499.
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you
can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
¾ This unit cannot copy NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected. ¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry
screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while
“Power Save in Standby” is not activated (Quick Start mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
The timer programme remains even after recording finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable. You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs. (> 62)
The programme name and the recorded title do not match.
¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set
but the recorded title still has the old programme name.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high speed mode.
¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to
“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 67)
¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if
the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”. – [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” mode. – [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode
or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD
recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with high-speed copy.
When copying, it takes a long time even when high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles. ¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP ( 8 hours ) mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the rotating DVD-R, etc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.
VQT3C69
80
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 55, 73) ¾ Select the input channel “AV2” for the equipment you have
connected.
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 26)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 26)
¾ Set the clock. (> 70) ¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be
correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes, or set “Start Recording Time” and “Finish Recording Time” in the Setup menu. (> 26, 67)
Timer recording does not stop even when [] is pressed.
¾ When using the linked timer recording with external equipment,
press [EXT LINK]. (“EXT-L” disappears.) (> 25)
Play
Play fails to start even when [1](PLAY) is pressed. Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 15) ¾ The disc is dirty. (> 15) ¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(> 12–13)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ You may be able to copy a copyright-protected title that was
recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8 hours )” mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6 hours )” mode. (> 67)
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you
purchased it. (DivX) (> 36)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry
screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters. ¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View. ¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 22)
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change
this setting. (> 67)
¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is
not defective. (> Cover)
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc. ¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes. (> 18)
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized position on the disc is cancelled when
– press [] several times. – open the disc tray. – [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit. – if a recording or timer recording was executed.
The Video CD picture does not display properly.
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV
System” in the Setup menu. (> 69)
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture
cannot be displayed correctly during search.
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 4 GB. (DivX)
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable) When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the beginning of the title.
¾ The resume play function is activated.
Press [OPTION] while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed and press [3, 4] to select “Play from beginning” and then press [OK].
Edit
Available disc space does not increase even after deleting a title.
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-
R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 21)
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
space. Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 21, 43,
62)
¾ If you have set the “Child Lock” (> 66), the 4-digit PIN entry
screen may appear. Press the numbered buttons to enter your 4-digit PIN and press [OK].
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc. ¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
(> 60)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
angles are recorded.
You have forgotten your ratings PIN. You want to cancel the ratings level.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital. ¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs. ¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 69)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 15)
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (> 12–13)
Cannot create chapters. Cannot mark the start point or the end point during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when
you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures. ¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine
Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 43)
Cannot create a Playlist (Video).
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
Reference
VQT3C69
81
Troubleshooting guide
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can
be displayed with this unit.
Still pictures
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or
while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.
Copying, deleting and setting protection takes a long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take
a few hours.
¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a
long time. Format the disc. (> 62)
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as
PROGRESSIVE JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 14)
USB
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 15) ¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.) (> 14)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 14)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again. ¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 14) ¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
TV Guide
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ This unit can only display either the TV Guide for the digital
broadcasts or for the analogue broadcasts. Default setting is TV Guide for the digital broadcasts. To display the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type” in Setup menu. (> 71)
¾ [Analogue] The GUIDE Plus+ system data is updated several
times each day. When the unit is first connected, the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet ready to receive data. It takes approximately 2 hours to complete data download. Depending on when you set up this unit, it may take approximately one day before you can display the television programme list. (> 10, 30)
¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] In the area where GUIDE Plus+ system is
available, check whether correct post code is entered. (> 30,
71)
¾ Check whether TV Guide system setup was performed in full. ¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 70) ¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
¾ [Analogue] These stations may not have been able to be
identified automatically. For these stations, select the “On” in the sub menu under “Editor” and assign the correct reference station manually. (> 30)
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system. ¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via S
(> 26, 29)
The TV Guide information is not displayed properly.
¾ [Analogue] The reference station is not assigned correctly in
“Editor”. Select the correct reference station. (> 30)
¾ [Analogue] Programme information about analogue broadcasts
is not displayed when you set “TV Guide Type” to “Digital Channels”. To use the TV Guide for the analogue broadcasts, change “TV Guide Type”. (> 71)
¾ There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV Guide system provider or station provider.
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If
the unit is in EXT LINK mode (EXT-L lights up in the display), then the data update may also not work.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. ¾ [DVB-T] [Analogue] Make sure that “TV Guide Download in
Standby” or “Night Download” is set to “On”. (> 30, 71)
HOWVIEW.
VQT3C69
82
Digital broadcast
VIERA Link
[DVB-T] Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet. ¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,
or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Switch “Active Antenna” to “On” in the Setup menu if you are
using an indoor antenna. (> 70)
[DVB-T] After DVB Auto Setup only some or no DVB channels are found.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions. ¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception performance. (> 6)
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels. “No Signal” message is displayed.
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer or CATV provider.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu. (> 65)
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”
are displayed in red or constantly changing, check the aerial or the connection. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer or CATV provider. (> 65)
¾ Check that the aerial or connecting cable is designed for DVB. ¾ Check the connection.
[DVB-T] Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
[DVB-C] Even after scanning channels with “Full Scan” in DVB Auto Setup, some channels are not found or no channels are found.
¾ Check the connections. (> 6, 73) ¾ You can specify optional symbol rates for scanning channels as
follows:
1 Restart auto channel setting. (> 64, Auto Setup Restart) 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Digital Cable (DVB-C) & Analogue
Channels” or “Digital Cable (DVB-C) Channels” and press [OK].
3 Press [OPTION] in “DVB Auto Setup” screen. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “---- ksym/s (User Def.)” and enter
the symbol rate with numbered buttons and then press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
Then go to step 5 on page 8 and complete the settings.
Refer to your CATV provider about the symbol rate information.
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 69) ¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device. ¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations. 1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other than the main ones to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for language settings, Slideshow Settings, clock settings, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for tuning settings, clock settings, language settings, disc language settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory presets. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 71)
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Language setting screen appears. All the settings except for clock settings, remote control code, ratings levels and PINs (“Ratings” in Disc menu and “Child Lock” in Tuning menu), etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 3 seconds. (The
settings remain.)
Other
After performing an update, you can no longer receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
Reference
VQT3C69
83
Specifications
Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R: 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1) DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0) DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3) +R DL: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) +RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Maximum Approx. 279 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 35 hours, SP: Approx. 70 hours
LP: Approx. 140 hours, EP: Approx. 209 hours/279 hours
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format, JPEG
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,
§1
, JPEG§1, DivX
§1
, JPEG§1, DivX
MP3
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, SVCD
§1§2
JPEG
, MP3§1,
§
1
, DivX
Internal HDD capacity 160 GB
Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD 780 nm wave length DVD 662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Audio
Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch (XP, SP LP, EP mode),
Linear PCM (XP mode) Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin) Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Input impedance: More than 10 k Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack) Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Output impedance: Less than 1 k Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
Video
Video system:
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal
NTSC colour signal
Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR) Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 S-Video in (PAL/SECAM/NTSC): AV2 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack), 1 Vp-p 75
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p 75
Television system
Tuner system Channel coverage
PAL -B, G,H (CCIR)
VHF: E2–E12, A–H2 (Italy) UHF: 21–69 CATV: S01–S05 (S1–S3),
S1–S20 (M1–U10), S21–S41
DVB-T/C (Germany)
VHF: 5–12 UHF: 21–69 CATV: D051 - D073, D113 - D858,
S1–S20 (M1–U10) 7 MHz Band 51 – 858 MHz
RF converter output: Not provided Active Antenna output: 5 V switched, 50 mA max.,
over current protected.
USB port Type A : 1 pc
USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed Format: FAT16, FAT32
Video (SD Video)
§3
Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile) File Format: SD-Video format conforming
Common Interface (CI) Slot
EN 50221 Standard, 1 slot, Type I and II PC Card (5 V only),
rear side
Others
§1
§1
Region code: Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation) Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
2
Power consumption: Approx. 38 W
§2
§
1
Dimensions (WkHkD): 430 mmk59 mmk286 mm Mass: Approx. 3.5 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and
“RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)
Approx. 16 W (“Power Save in Standby” is not activated.)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
§1
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§2
Conforming to IEC62107 This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.
§3
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD­RAM disc, the playback is possible.
VQT3C69
84
Glossary
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.
CI (Common Interface)
Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the addition of a CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital TV/Recorder.
CI Plus
CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional security and features to the proven DVB Common Interface Standard that will allow CI Plus compatible consumer electronics devices, such as Integrated Digital Televisions and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide range of Pay TV Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI Plus Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMI reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method. When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then only output the front two channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc (DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs)
or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for recording again.
TM
Deep Colour technology that can
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), +RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit. Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
Frame Field Field
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
H.264
This is a method of video compression and is equivalent to MPEG-4 AVC. It has a broad application range that covers all forms of digital compressed video from low bit-rate Internet streaming applications to HD broadcasts.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high­definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2. SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and information with menus. (This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Reference
VQT3C69
85
Glossary
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave (analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a list.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50 Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50 progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
th
of a second to create a progressive image.
th
of a second to create a progressive image. Since
Cd
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
VQT3C69
86
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/
®
DivX
, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
“DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
)
Reference
VQT3C69
87
Index
Active Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 70
Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Audio
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66
Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 42
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 67
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 72, 85
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 70
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 73
Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 7, 73
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Copy
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Title/Playlist (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 43
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 68, 69
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 60, 66
DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 33, 37, 42, 46
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–13
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 17
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 35–36, 85
DVB Multi Audio
Record with selected audio . . . . . . . . . 19
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 60
DVB Subtitle
Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 61
Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 85
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 85
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 23, 24
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . 5, 41, 68
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 30, 31
H.264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 69, 85
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 37–38, 85
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital satellite receiver)
—EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 70
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 85
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35–36
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 36
Music on HDD
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 43
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 65
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 48
Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Properties
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 46
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 67
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 26–31
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 60
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HOWVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
S
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 38, 49
Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Subtitle
Digital broadcast
(DVB Subtitle) . . . . . . . . . 17, 19, 61, 66
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 67
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tuning
Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
List of TV Reception Channels . . . . . . . 75
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 20, 27, 31
TV Guide Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
USB
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39–40, 69
EU
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
© Panasonic Corporation 2010
p
VQT3C69
F1210MT0
Loading...